Some symbolic expressions for number two

Share it with your friends Like

Thanks! Share it with your friends!

Close

Some symbolic expressions for the number «two»

CONTENS

अक्षि अश्विन् कर दस्र दृश् द्वापर द्वित्व द्वित्वम् नेत्रम् पक्ष पक्षः पक्षक यम यमल युज्

अक्षि — akṣi Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899akṣi n. (1. «aś» ([instr. «akṣṇā» dat. «akṣṇe», &c., fr. «akṣan»,

substituted for «akṣi» in the weakest cases. Vedic forms are: abl. gen.

«akṣṇas»; loc. «akṣan» (once «akṣiṇi»!); du. nom. acc. «akṣī» , «akṣiṇī,

akṣyau», and «akṣyau» and ; instr. «akṣībhyām»; gen. «akṣyos» , «akṣyos»

and «akṣos» (!) ; pl. nom. acc. «akṣīṇi» , «akṣāṇi» ; ifc. «akṣa» is

substituted see 4. «akṣa»]), the eye

n. the number two

akṣi n. du. the sun and moon

akṣi n. ([cf. Gk. [greek]; Lat. ‘oculos’; A.S. ‘aegh’; Goth. ‘augo’; Germ.

‘Auge’; Russ. ‘oko’; Lith. ‘aki-s’.])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

akṣi n. [aśnute viṣayān; aś-ksi, aśorṇit Uṇ. 3. 155-6] akṣiṇī, akṣīṇi, akṣṇā,

akṣṇaḥ &c.

(1) The eye (which grasps or sees objects); changed to akṣa at the

end of Bahuvrīhi Comp; f. -kṣī when a limb of the body is indicated, as

jalajākṣī, otherwise dīrghākṣāveṇuyaṣṭiḥ; in Avyayī. comp. also it is

changed to akṣa, (samakṣaṁ, parokṣaṁ &c.).

(2) The number two; (—kṣiṇī) the sun and moon. [cf. L. oculus; Ger.

auge; Gr. okos, okkos, Zend ashi.]

— Comp.

—kaṁpaḥ twinkling; nākṣikaṁpaṁ vyatiṣṭhata R. 15. 67.

—kūṭaḥ —ṭakaḥ, —golaḥ, —tārā [ṣa. ta.] the eyeball, pupil of the

eye.

—gata a. [akṣṇi gataḥ sarvadā bhāvanāvaśāt akṣyasannikṛṣṭopi

upasthita iva] 1 visible, present; na vibhāvayatyaniśamakṣigatāmapi māṁ

bhavānatisamīpatayā Śi. 9. 81. 2. rankling in the eye, an eye-sore, being a

thorn in the eye, hated; -tohamasya hāsyo jātaḥ Dk. 159.

—jāhaḥ [ṣa. ta.] the root of the eye.

—pakṣman, —loman n. [ṣa. ta.] the eyelash.

—paṭalaṁ [ṣa. ta.]. a coat of the eye. 2. a disease of the eye

pertaining to this coat.

—pat a. Ved. falling into the eye, hence hurtful. —adv. a little, as

much as a mote (as much as could fall into the eye).

—bhū a. [akṣṇo bhūrviṣayaḥ] visible, perceptible, manifest;

(hence) true, real.

—bheṣajaṁ [ṣa. ta.] collyrium, a kind of balm (for the eyes).

—jaḥ (jaṁ also) N. of a plant (paṭṭikālodhravṛkṣa) used to heal

some varieties of the eye-disease.

—bhruvaṁ [samāhāradvaṁdva] the eye and the eyebrows taken

collectively.

—vikūṇitaṁ, —vikūśitaṁ [akṣṇaḥ vikūṇitaṁ lajjādinā samyak

prasārābhāvāt saṁkoco yatra] a side-look, leer, a look with the eyelids

partially closed.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

akṣi n. UṆ. 3, 154. Von diesem Thema kennt die spätere Sprache

folgende Formen: Sg. N. akṣi, V. akṣi und akṣe; Du. N. V. Acc. akṣiṇī,

Instr. D. Abl. akṣibhyām; Pl. N. V. Acc. akṣīṇi, Instr. akṣibhis, D. Abl.

akṣibhyas, Loc. akṣiṣu; die übrigen Casus werden aus akṣan gebildet, P.

7, 1, 75. VOP. 3, 95. Aus der Veda-Literatur lassen sich folgende Formen

belegen: Sg. N. Acc. akṣi, Loc. akṣiṇi BṚH. ĀR. UP. 4, 2, 3 (sonst immer

akṣan) CHĀND. UP. 1, 7, 5; Du. N. Acc. akṣiṇī nur AV. und ŚAT. BR. akṣī

P. 7, 1, 77, Sch. ṚV. 1, 72, 10. 116, 6. 117, 17. 120, 6. 2, 39, 5. AIT. BR.

1, 21. (aus einem älteren Liede) akṣyau (wie von einem Fem. auf ī; vgl.

sakthi) AV. 1, 27, 1. 5, 23, 3. 29, 4. 6, 9, 1. 7, 36, 1. AIT. BR. 6, 1. akṣyau

ŚAT. BR. 3, 1, 3, 10. 8, 2, 6. Instr. akṣībhyām P. 7, 1, 77, Sch. ṚV. 10,

163, 1. AV. 11, 4, 3. Gen. akṣyos VS. 21, 48. akṣyos AV. 6, 24, 2. 127, 3.

akṣos 5, 4, 10; Pl. N. Acc. akṣīṇi AV. 6, 5, 5 (an der entsprechenden Stelle

ṚV. 7, 57, 6: akṣāṇi). «Auge» AK. 2, 6, 2, 44. 3, 6, 3, 22. H. 575. M. 4, 67.

Der Dual akṣī bezeichnet «Sonne» und «Mond» ṚV. 1, 72, 10; vgl.

tasyaudanasya dyāvāpṛthivī śrotre sūryācandramasāvakṣiṇī AV. 11, 3, 2.

4, 3. In Zusammensetzungen ist akṣi (nicht akṣan) im Gebrauch; am

Ende eines adject. Compositums erscheint jedoch stets akṣa, P. 5, 4,

113. In einer übertragenen Bedeutung trifft man indessen auch akṣi an:

sthūlākṣirikṣuḥ P. 5, 4, 113, Sch. — Vgl. 2. akṣa 5 und 3. akṣa 2.

akṣi Sp. 20, Z. 6 lies 11, 3, 34 st. 11, 4, 3; Z. 7 lies 4, 5, 5 st. 6, 5, 5. —

akṣi als N. einer Upanishad Ind. St. 3, 325.

akṣi wie akṣan auch «Sinnesorgan» BHĀG. P. 3, 5, 44. In der Bed. «Auge»

Bez. «der Zahl zwei» SŪRYAS. 1, 30. fg. 34. 2, 19. 12, 89.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

akṣi akṣi (cf. 1. akṣa), n., in some cases akṣan is substituted. The eye.

— Comp. agra-, n. the first look.

— Cf. [greek] in [greek] Goth. augo; A.S. aegh, eag.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

akṣi n. eye.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

akṣi akṣi, n. eye: -° a, f. ī.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

akṣi klī (aśnute anena . aśū vyāptau saṁghāte ca . aśorniditi kmiḥ . yadvā

. akṣati . akṣū vyāptau . in .) cakṣuḥ . ityamaraḥ . cakṣurgolakaḥ . iti kecit

..

अश्विन् — aśvin Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899aśvin mfn. possessed of horses, consisting of horses

mfn. mounted on horseback

aśvin m. a cavalier

mfn. horse-tamer

aśvin mfn. («īnā» or «inau») m. du. «the two charioteers», N. of two

divinities (who appear in the sky before the dawn in a golden carriage

drawn by horses or birds; they bring treasures to men and avert

misfortune and sickness; they are considered as the physicians of

heaven) &c.

mfn. a N. of the Nakshatra presided over by the Aśvins

mfn. the number, «two»

aśvin mfn. (for «aśvi-sutau») the two sons of the Aśvins, viz. Nakula and

Sahadeva

aśvin mfn. («aśvini», shortened for the sake of metre)

aśvin n. (= «aśva-vat» n. q.v.) richness in horses

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

aśvin a. [aśva-astyarthe ini] Possessed of horses, consisting of horses;

Rv. 4. 2. 5. —m. A cavalier, a horse-tamer. —nau (du.)

(1) The two physicians of the gods who are represented as the twin

sons of the sun by a nymph in the form of a mare; cf. tvāṣṭrī tu

saviturbhāryā vaḍavārūpadhāriṇī .. asūyata mahābhāgā

sāṁtarīkṣe’śvināvubhau … [According to Vedic conception they are the

harbingers of Ushas or the dawn; they are young, beautiful, bright, swift

&c.; and, according to Yāska, they represent the transition from darkness

to light, when the intermingling of both produces that inseparable duality

expressed by the twin nature of these deities; according to different

interpretations quoted in the Nirukta they were ‘heaven and earth’, ‘day

and night’, ‘two kings, performers of holy acts’ which may be traced to

their dual and luminous nature. Mythically they were the parents of

Nakula and Sahadeva and the physicians of the gods and are called

Gadāgadau, Svarvaidyau, Dasrau, Nāsatyau, Vādaveyau, Abdhijau &c.

They were celebrated for their active benevolence and curative power

which they showed in restoring the sage Chyavana, when grown old and

decrepit, to youth, and prolonged his life.].

(2) Two horses.

(3) (In astr.) The twins of the zodiac.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

aśvin (von aśva) 1) adj. «mit Pferden versehen, aus Pferden bestehend,

equinus»: gomāṁ agne ‘vimāṁ aśvī yajñaḥ ṚV. 4, 2, 5. sa no niyudbhirā

pṛṇa kāmaṁ vājebhiraśvibhiḥ 6, 47, 21. ratham 10, 75, 9. rayiṁ

gomantamaśvinam 9, 67, 6. 4, 10. aśvī rathī surūpa idgomāṁ idindra te

sakhā 8, 4, 9. — 2) m. subst. «Rossebändiger»: aśvīva tāṁ ati yeṣaṁ

rathena 2, 27, 16. Agni: yamaśvī nityamupayāti yajñam 7, 1, 12. Indra

und Agni 1, 109, 4. 4, 34, 19. — 3) m. du. aśvinau «die beiden

Rosselenker», zwei Lichtgötter, die zuerst am Morgenhimmel erscheinen

(ṚV. 7, 67, 3. 8, 5, 2), auf einem von geflügelten Rossen oder von Vögeln

gezogenen goldenen Wagen (8, 5, 33. 35. 1, 118, 4) zum Frühopfer, nach

anderer Auffassung dreimal am Tage zum Altar, kommen. Man rühmt ihre

rettenden Thaten (1, 118, 3), Schenkungen, Heilungen; sie erscheinen

schon im Veda als die göttlichen Aerzte (8, 9, 6. 22, 10. 75, 1. 10, 39, 3.

Vgl. TAITT. BR. 3, 1, 2, 13. SUŚR. 1, 3. AK. 1, 1, 1, 47. H. 181). Die Aśvin

sind Söhne der Saraṇyū (ṚV. 10, 17, 2), einer Tochter Tvaṣṭar’s, die die

Gestalt einer Stute angenommen hatte (BṚH. DEV. in Z. f. vgl. Spr. 2,

442. MBH. 1, 2599). Daher heissen die Aśvin auch baḍavāsutau. Aus

Saraṇyū ist HARIV. 545 Sureṇu geworden, die auch den Namen Saṁjñā

führt (ebend. und VP. 266); vgl. auch weiter unten u. 3. R. 3, 20, 15 wird

Aditi als Mutter der Aśvin genannt. Die Aśvin sind die stäten Begleiter

Indra’s (R. 1, 24, 8) und Muster der Schönheit (N. 1, 26). Ihr

gewöhnlicher Beiname ist nāsatyau und dasrau, woraus die spätere Zeit

einen Aśvin Nāsatya und einen Dasra gebildet hat. Ueber ihre Auffassung

s. NIR. 12, 1. — AV. 2, 29, 6. 30, 2. 3, 3, 4. 4, 4. u.s.w. AIT. BR. 4, 8. M.

4, 231. LIA. I, 762. fg. Die Aśvin erscheinen am Himmel auch als «die

Zwillinge im Thierkreise» Ind. St. 2, 259. 278, N. — 4) f. aśvinī eine den

beiden Aśvin an die Seite gestellte Göttin wie Indrāṇī dem Indra ṚV. 5,

46, 8. gilt später für die Mutter der beiden Aśvin, daher heissen diese

aśvinīsutau (AK. 1, 1, 1, 46) und aśvinīputrau (H. 181). Am Himmel: «das

Haupt des Widders» oder «das erste Mondhaus» AK. 1, 1, 2, 23. H. 108.

VP. 226, N. 21. COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II, 328. 363. 425. 463. LIA. II, 1116.

fg. Ind. St. 2, 413. fg. Vgl. aśvayuj. — 5) n. «Pferdereichthum» (vgl.

aśvavant): nirundhāno amatiṁ gobhiraśvinā ṚV. 1, 53, 4.

aśvin 1) «zu Pferde sitzend, reitend» MĀRK. P. 21, 10. — 3) aśvinau

vaivaśvatau Ind. St.3,204,a. aśvinoḥ saṁyojanam, aśvinoḥ sāma und

aśvinorvratam Namen von Sāman ebend. aśvinostīrtham Verz. d. Oxf. H.

67,a,36. «die beiden» Aśvin so v. a. «das» Nakshatra, «dessen Gottheit sie

sind», VARĀH. BṚH. S. 6, 12. 10, 3. 71, 6. Bez. «der Zahl zwei» 98, 1. —

4) aśvinīsutau Verz. d. Oxf. H. 22,a,3 v. u. 309,b,25. Ueber das Nakshatra

s. WEBER, JYOT. und Naksh. sg. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 11, 54. 15, 26. pl. 9, 2.

102, 1.

aśvin 3) du. so v. a. aśviputrau d. i. Nakula und Sahadeva MBH. 5, 1816.

Als Bez. der «Zahl zwei» (vgl. Nachträge). SŪRYAS. 1, 32. fg. 12, 89. — 4)

als Nakshatra SŪRYAS. 8, 16. 9, 13. an beiden Stellen aśvini des Metrums

wegen.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

aśvin aśvin, i. e. aśva + in, m., du. Two deities, Rām. 1, 24, 8.

— Cf. the Dioscuri.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

aśvin a. horsed. m. horseman; du. the two Aśvins; f. aśvinī their wife or

mother.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

aśvin aśv-in, a. rich in horses; m. charioteer: du. the Aśvins, twin gods of

the dawn..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

aśvin pu° dviva° aśvāḥ santi yayoḥ ini, aśvinyāṁ nakṣatre bhavau

sandhivelādyutṛnakṣatrebhyaḥ pā° aṇ nakṣatrebhyobahulam pā° vā luk

luki strīpratyayasya luk, aśvā utpattiḥ sthātatvenāstyasya ini vā . 1

svargavaidyayoḥ . kimaśvinau somarasaṁ pipāsū bhaṭṭiḥ

vāsodaścandrasālokyamaśvisālokyamaśvadaḥ manuḥ . tvāṣṭrī tu

saviturbhāryā baḍavārūpadhāriṇī . asūyata mahābhāgā

sāntarīkṣe’śvinābubhau bhā° ā° pa° . yā vāṁ kaśā madhumatyaśvinā

sunṛtāvatī yaju° 7, 2 . aśvastaccihnāvartaḥ astyarthe ini .

kapolayostathāvartau vidyete vājinoryadi . tāvāśvināviti proktau

rājyavṛddhikarau parau ityuktalakṣaṇayoḥ 2 hayayośca dvi° va° . 3

hayayukte tri° . striyāṁ ṅīp . gomā agne’vimāṁ aśvī ṛ° 4, 2, 5 .

कर — kara Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kara (for 2. see p.254, col.3) mf («ī», rarely «ā») n. (1. «kṛ»), a doer,

maker, causer, doing, making, causing, producing (esp. ifc.; cf.

«duḥkhakara, bhayaṁ-k-, sampat-k-«, &c.; cf. Lat. «cerus», «creator»)

&c.; helping, promoting ; m. the act of doing, making &c. (ifc.; cf.

«īṣatkara, su-k-, duṣ-k-«, &c.); «the doer», the hand &c.; a measure (the

breadth of twenty-four thumbs); an elephant’s trunk &c.; the claws of a

crab ; symbolical expression for the number two; the lunar mansion

Hasta

kara (for 1. see p.253, col.1) m. («kṝ»), a ray of light, sunbeam,

moonbeam &c.; hail ; royal revenue, toll, tax, tribute, duty

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

kara a. (rā or rī) [karoti, kīryate anena iti, kṛ-kṝ-ap] (Mostly at the end of

comp.) Who or what does, makes or causes &c; duḥkha-, sukha-,

bhayaṁ- &c. —raḥ

(1) A hand; karaṁ vyādhunvatyāḥ pibasi ratisarvasvamadharaṁ S. 1.

24.

(2) A ray of light, beam; yamuddhartuṁ pūṣā vyavasita

ivālaṁbitakaraḥ V. 4. 34; also pratikūlatāmupagate hi vidhau

viphalatvameti bahusādhanatā . avalaṁbanāya dinabharturabhūnna

patiṣyataḥ karasahasramapi Śi. 9. 6 (where the word is used in sense 1

also).

(3) The trunk of an elephant; sekaḥ sīkariṇā kareṇa vihitaḥ U. 3. 16;

Bh. 3. 20.

(4) A tax, toll, tribute; yuvā karākrāṁtamahībhṛduccakairasaṁśayaṁ

saṁprati tejasā raviḥ Śi. 1. 70; (where kara means ‘ray’ also) (dadau)

aparāṁtamahīpālavyājena raghave karaṁ R. 4. 58; Ms. 7. 128.

(5) Hail.

(6) A particular measure of length equal to 24 thumbs.

(7) The asterism called hasta.

— Comp.

—agraṁ 1. the forepart of the hand. —2. the tip of an elephant’s

trunk.

—āghātaḥ a stroke or blow with the hand.

—āroṭaḥ a finger-ring

—ālaṁbaḥ supporting with the hand, giving a helping hand.

—āsphoṭaḥ 1. the chest. —2. a blow with the hand.

—ṛddhiḥ f. 1. a cymbal. —2. a small musical instrument.

—kaṁṭakaḥ, -kaṁ a finger-nail.

—kamalaṁ, —paṁkajaṁ, —padmaṁ a lotus-like hand, beautiful

hand; karakamalavitīrṇairaṁbunīvāraśaṣpaiḥ U. 3. 25.

—kalaśaḥ, śaṁ the hollow of the hand (to receive water).

—kisalayaḥ, —yaṁ 1. ‘sprout-like hand’, a tender hand;

karakisalayatālairmugdhayā nartyamānaṁ U. 3. 19; Rs. 6. 30. —2. a

finger.

—kuḍmalaṁ the finger.

—koṣaḥ the cavity of the palms, hands hollowed to receive water;

-peyamaṁbu Ghaṭ. 22.

—grahaḥ, -grahaṇaṁ —1. levying a tax. —2. taking the hand in

marriage. —3. marriage.

—grāhaḥ 1. a husband. —2. a tax-collector.

—gharṣaṇaḥ, -gharṣin m. the churning-stick.

—chadaḥ the teak tree.

—jaḥ a fingernail; tīkṣṇakarajakṣuṇṇāt Ve. 4. 1; Śi. 11. 37; Bv. 1.

105; Amaru. 85. (

—jaṁ) a kind of perfume.

—jālaṁ a stream of light.

—talaḥ the palm of the hand; vanadevatākaratalaiḥ S. 4. 4;

karatalagatamapi naśyati yasya tu bhavitavyatā nārita Pt. 2. 124. —

āmalakaṁ (lit.) an āmalaka fruit (fruit of the Myrobalan) placed on the

palm of the hand; (fig.) ease and clearness of perception, such as is

natural in the case of a fruit placed on the palm of the hand;

karatalāmalakaphalavadakhilaṁ jagadālokayatāṁ K. 43. -stha a. resting

on the palm of the hand.

—tālaḥ,-tālakaṁ 1. clapping the hands; sa jahāsa

dattakaratālamuccakaiḥ Śi. 15. 39. —2. a kind of musical instrument,

perhaps a cymbal.

—tālikā, —tālī 1. clapping the hands; uccāṭanīyaḥ karatālikānāṁ

dānādidānīṁ bhavatībhireṣaḥ N. 3. 7. —2. beating time by clapping the

hands.

—toyā N. of a river.

—da a. 1. paying taxes —2. tributary; karadīkṛtākhilanṛpāṁ

medinīṁ Ve. 6. 18. —3. giving the hand to help &c.

—dakṣa a. handy, dexterous.

—patraṁ 1. a saw. —2. playing in water. -vat m. the palm tree.

—patrakaṁ a saw.

—patrikā splashing water about while bathing or sporting in it.

—pallavaḥ 1. a tender hand. —2. a finger; cf. -kisalaya. —pālaḥ,

pālikā 1. a sword. —2. a cudgel.

—pātraṁ 1. splashing water about while bathing. —2. the hand

hollowed to hold anything.

—pīḍanaṁ marriage; cf. pāṇipīḍana. —puṭaḥ the hands joined and

hollowed to receive anything.

—pṛṣṭhaṁ the back of the hand.

—bālaḥ, —vālaḥ 1. sword; aghoraghaṁṭaḥ karavālapāṇirvyāpāditaḥ

Māl. 9; mlecchanivahanidhane kalayasi karavālam Gīt. 1, Śi. 13. 60. —2. a

finger-nail.

—bhāraḥ a large amount of tribute.

—bhūḥ a finger-nail.

—bhūṣaṇaṁ an ornament worn round the wrist, such as a bracelet.

—mālaḥ smoke.

—muktaṁ a kind of weapon; see āyudha. —ruhaḥ 1. a finger-nail;

anāghrātaṁ puṣpaṁ kisalayamalūnaṁ kararuhaiḥ S. 2. 10; Me. 96. —2. a

sword.

—vālikā a small club.

—vīraḥ, —vīrakaḥ 1. a sword or scimitar. —2. a cemetery. —3. N. of

a town in the S. M. country. —4. a kind of tree. (

—rā) red arsenic. (

—rī) 1. a woman who has borne a son, a mother —2. N. of Aditi. —

3. a good cow. (

—raṁ) the flower of the tree.

—śākhā a finger.

—śīkaraḥ water thrown out by an elephant’s trunk.

—śūkaḥ a finger-nail.

—śothaḥ swelling of the hands.

—sādaḥ 1. weakness of the hand. —2. the fading of rays.

—sūtraṁ a marriage string worn round the wrist.

—sthālin m. an epithet of Śiva.

—svanaḥ clapping of the hands.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

kara (von 1. kar) 1) adj. «thuend, ausführend, bereitend» AV. 12, 2, 2. Am

Ende eines comp. «machend, bewirkend»; f. ī P. 3, 2, 20. fgg. VOP. 26, 47.

H. 5. anudvegakara M. 2, 47. buddhivṛddhi- 4, 19. atuṣṭi- 217.

sattvavṛddhi- 259. śreyaskara 5, 136. vaira- 9, 227. pitta- SUŚR. 1, 219,

14. balavarṇa- 246, 18. mārdava- 156, 2. nidrā-, śīta- 176, 3. ayaśaskarī

HIḌ. 3, 18. paśuvṛddhikarī M. 7, 212. PAÑCAT. III, 82. saṁpatkarī IV, 36.

setubhedakarī YĀJÑ. 2, 278. vibhramakarī SĀH. D. 41, 13. antakarā (!) R.

3, 43, 28. śaṁkarā P. 3, 2, 14, Vārtt. Häufig in comp. mit einem acc. P. 3,

2, 43. fg.; vgl. abhayaṁkara, ubhayaṁkara, ṛtiṁkara, kiṁkara,

kṣemaṁkara, khajaṁkara, priyaṁkara, bhayaṁkara, madraṁkara,

meghaṁkara, vaśaṁkara. Alle diese compp. sind oxytona, desgleichen

die mit advv. zusammengesetzten satrākara und divākara; dagegen

sutekara «beim Opfer thätig.» — 2) m. a) «Hand (die vor Allem thätige»)

AK. 3, 4, 25, 166. H. 591. an. 2, 399. MED. r. 12. (valam) kareṇeva vi

cakartā raveṇa ṚV. 10, 67, 6. M. 5, 136. INDR. 2, 25. MBH. 3, 374. DAŚ.

1, 32. VIŚV. 6, 19. SUŚR. 1, 109, 10. 115, 17. HIT. I, 168. ŚĀK. 22. 140.

RAGH. 2, 31. dakṣiṇe tāṁ kare subhruṁ sundo jagrāha pāṇinā SUND. 4,

12. tasyā jagrāha — karam (bei der Hochzeit) KATHĀS. 16, 79. mumoca ca

katodvāhaḥ karādvatseśvaro vadhūm 82. karasaṁpīḍanaṁ kṛtvā MBH. 2,

904. prasāritakara HIT. I, 46. proddhṛte dakṣiṇe kare AK. 2, 7, 49. H. 845.

karadhṛta MEGH. 12. karagrāhaṁ (absol.) gṛhṇāti, karavartaṁ vartayati

P. 3, 4, 39, Sch. karakamala ṚT. 3, 23. karakaṁjasaṁpuṭa BHĀG. P. 1,

11, 2. karasāda «das Erschlaffen der Hände» (zugleich auch «das

Mattwerden der Strahlen») PAÑCAT. I, 194. karapādadataḥ (gen. sg.)

«der Hände, Füsse und Zähne» YĀJÑ. 2, 219. Als Längenmaass ist die

«Hand = 24 Daumenbreiten» H. 887. 134. COLEBR. Alg. 2. — b) «die Hand

des Elephanten» ist sein «Rüssel» H. 1224. H. an. MED. N. (BOPP) 13, 12.

MBH. 1, 8153. HIT. 41, 16. gajakara MBH. 3, 374. R. 3, 52, 32. karikara

PAÑCAT. III, 235.

kara (wie eben) m. «das Machen» P. 3, 3, 57, Sch. Am Ende einiger adj.

compp.: īṣatkara und sukara «leicht zu vollbringen», duṣkara «schwer zu

vollbringen» P. 3, 3, 126. 2, 3, 69. 6, 2, 139. īṣadāḍhyaṁkara «leicht reich

zu machen» 3, 3, 127, Sch.

kara (von 2. kar) adj. «andächtig»: ajohavīnnāsatyā karā vāṁ mahe

yāmanpurubhujā puraṁdhiḥ ṚV. 1, 116, 13. SĀY. identif. das Wort mit 1.

kara 1. und hält die Form für einen du.

kara (von 3. kar) m. 1) «Lichtstrahl» AK. 1, 1, 2, 35. 3, 4, 2, 19. 25, 166.

H. 100. an. 2, 399. MED. r. 12. dinakaraḥ karaistāpayate jagat R. 6, 11,

44. MEGH. 40. sūryakara PAÑCAT. 37, 20. pūṣakara CĀT. 7. arkakara

DEV. 10, 13. himakarakara DHŪRTAS. 92, 7. daśaśatakaradhārī (vidhuḥ)

ad HIT. I, 17. karasāda «das Mattwerden der Strahlen» (und auch «der

Hände») PAÑCAT. I, 194. karasahasra («Strahl» und «Hand») ŚIŚ. 9, 6.

Vgl. uṣṇakara und kiraṇa. — 2) «Hagel» H. an. MED. Vgl. karaka 2. — 3)

«Abgabe, Tribut» AK. 2, 8, 1, 27. 3, 4, 25, 166. 26, 197. H. 745. H. an.

MED. rāṣṭre kalpayetsatataṁ karān M. 7, 128. tathālpālpo grahītavyo

rāṣṭrādrājñābdikaḥ karaḥ 129. yasmādgṛhṇātyasau karān YĀJÑ. 1, 336.

haretkaraṁ rāṣṭrāt M. 9, 305. ya uddharetkaraṁ rājā BHĀG. P. 4, 21, 23.

karahāra adj. 20, 14. mriyamāṇo ‘pyādadīta na rājā śrotriyātkaram M. 7,

133. 8, 307. karaṁ tebhya upādāya MBH. 2, 1113. karastasmai

pradīyatām 1007. kṣaumājināni divyāni tasya te pradaduḥ karam 1053.

RAGH. 4, 58. baṇijo dāpayetkarān M. 7, 127. 137. 8, 394. MBH. 3, 15239.

fg. karamāhārayiṣyāmi rājñā sarvān 2, 985. 1101. jārāsaṁdhiṁ

sāntvayitvā kare ca viniveśya 1092. gṛhapatisakara «wovon der Hausherr

Abgabe erhebt» SADDH. P. 4, 19,a.

kara 2) c) «Scheere eines Krebses» HIT. 114, 14. — d) «das» Nakshatra

Hasta VARĀH. BṚH. S. 71, 9.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

kara kara, i. e. A kṛ + a,

I. latter part of comp. adj. and subst., f. rī, Making, causing, producing; e.

g. vaira-, Causing enmity, Man. 9, 227. a-yaśas-, Causing disgrace, Hiḍ. 3,

18. deha-, m. A father, MBh. 5, 3657.

II. m.

1. The hand, Man. 5, 136.

2. An elephant’s trunk, Nal. 13, 12.

B. kṛ10 + a, m.

1. A ray of light, Rām. 6, 11, 44.

2. Hail.

3. Royal revenue, Man. 7, 128; toll, Man. 7, 127.

— Comp. agra-, m. 1. the tip of the extended hand. 2. the extremity of the

hand and of a ray, Śiś. 9, 34. a-tuṣāra-kara, m. the sun, Śiś. 9, 7. kula-

kara, m. ancestor, MBh. 1, 6562. citra-, m. a painter, Kathās. 5, 30. dina-,

divasa-, and divā-, m. the sun, Bhartṛ. 2, 65. duṣkara, i. e. dus-, adj., f. rī,

difficult Man. 7. 55; duṣkaraṁ yadi, scarcely, Rām. 2, 73, 7. padma-,

I. m. a lotuslike hand, Bhāg. P. 7, 9, 26.

II. adj., f. rā, holding a lotus, Prab. 86, 3.

III. f. rā, a name of Śrī, Bhāg. P. 4, 20, 27. bhoga-, adj., f. rī, procuring

food, Bhartṛ. 2, 17. śūlodyatakara, i. e. śūla-udyata- (vb. yam), adj. with

a spear in his uplifted hand. sa-, adj. 1. bearing toll. 2. with rays. su-,

I. adj., f. rī. 1. casy, Man. 7, 55. 2. doing well

II. f. rā, a tractable cow.

III. n. charity, benevolence. a-su-, adj. to be shunned, Bhartṛ. 2, 61.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

kara f. ī1 (ā) making, doing, causing, producing (mostly —°); m. the hand

(lit. maker); an elephant’s trunk.

kara [2] m. ray of light, sun-beam; revenue, tax, tribute.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

kara 1. kar-a, a. (ī, rarely ā) doing, making; causing, producing (generally

-°); m. hand; elephant’s trunk.

kara 2. kar-a, m. ray; duty, tax.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

kara pu° kīryate vikṣimyate’nena kṝ—karaṇe ap . 1 haste hastiśuṇḍe ca

tayorjalādikṣepasādhanatvāt tathātvam 2 karmaṇi ap . 3 kiraṇe mediniḥ .

tatra hastakiraṇayoḥ pratikūlatāmupagate hi vidhau viphalatvameti

bahusādhanatā . avalambanāya dinabharturabhūpanna patiṣyataḥ

karasahasramapi sthitaḥ karāgrairasamagrapātibhiḥ māghaḥ . haste

keśānnīvīmadhaḥ kāyaṁ saṁspṛśet dharaṇīmapi . yadi spṛśati caitāni

bhūyaḥprakṣalayet karam ā° ta° devalaḥ netyanuvṛttiḥ vāmaḥ

kāñcanapiñjare nṛpakarāgbhojaintanūmārja nam udbhaṭaḥ . tathā

vāmakare daśa manuḥ . kaṁsukhaṁ rāṭhi rā ka . 4 rājagrāhye rājasye

tatra rājagrāhyahastayoḥ asambhavadghanarasā śatālipariṣevitā . karaṁ

na sahate rājan! bhūbhirnavabadhūriva . tanvi tava kucāvetau niyataṁ

cakravartinau . āsamudrakṣitīśo’pi bhavān yatra karapradaḥ udbhaṭaḥ .

yathā ca rājñā karaniveśanaṁ rāṣṭre karaṇīyaṁ tathā manunoktam yathā

krayavikrayabhadhvānaṁ bhaktañca saparivyayam . yogakṣemañca

samprekṣya baṇijo dāpayet karān . yāthā phalena yujyeta rājā kartā ca

karmaṇām . tathāvekṣya nṛpo rāṣṭre kalpayet satataṁ karān .

yathālpālpamadantyādyaṁ vāryokovatsaṣaṭpadāḥ . tathālpālpo grahītavyo

rāṣṭrādrājñāvdikaḥ karaḥ . pañcāśadbhāga ādeyo rājñā paśuhiraṇḍyayoḥ .

dhānyānāmaṣṭamo bhāgaḥ ṣaṣṭho dvādaśa eva vā . ādadītātha

ṣaḍbhāgaṁ drumāṁsamadhusarpiṣām . gandhauṣadhirasānāñca

puṣpamūlaphalasya ca . patraśākatṛṇānāñca vaidalasya ca carmaṇām .

mṛṇmayānāñca bhāṇḍānāṁ sarvasyāśmamayasya ca .

mriyamāṇo’pyādadīta narājā śrotriyāt karam . na ca kṣudhā’sya

saṁsīdecchrotriyo viṣaye vasan . yasya rājñastu viṣaye śrotriyaḥ sīdati

kṣudhā . tasyāpi tatkṣudhā rāṣṭramacireṇaiva sīdati . śrutavṛtte

vidatvā’sya vṛttiṁ dharmyāṁ prakalpayet . saṁrakṣet sarvataścainaṁ

pitā puttrāmivaurasam . saṁrakṣyamāṇo rājñā yaṁ kurute

dharmamanvaham . tenāyurvardhate rājño draviṇaṁ rāṣṭrameva ca .

yatkiñcidapi varṣasya dāpayet karasaṁjñitam . vyavahāreṇa jīvantaṁ rājā

rāṣṭre pṛthagjanam . kārukān śilpinaścaiva śūdrāṁścātmopajīvinaḥ .

ekaikaṁ kārayet karma māsi māsi mahīpatiḥ . nocchindyādātmanomūlaṁ

pareṣāñcātitṛṣṇayā . ucchindan hyātmano mūlamā tmānaṁ tāṁśca

prīḍayet vyākhyātañcedaṁ kullūkabhaṭṭena krayavikrayamityādi . kiyatā

mūlyena krītamidaṁ vastralavaṇādi dravyaṁ vikrīyamāṇañcātra

kiyallabhyate kiyaddūrādānītaṁ kimasya baṇijo bhaktavyayena

śākasūpādinā parivyayena lagnaṁ kimasyāraṇya dau

caurādibhyorakṣayaḥ rūpeṇa kṣemapratividhānena gataṁ, ko’sya idānīṁ

lābhayogaityetadavekṣya baṇijaḥ karān dāpayet . yatheti . yathā

rājā’vekṣaṇādikarmaṇaḥ phalena, yathā ca

kārṣikabaṇigādākṛṣibāṇijyādikarmaṇāṁ phalena samvadhyate . tathā

nirūpya rājā sarvadā rāṣṭrāt karān gṛhṇīyāt . atra dṛṣṭāntamāha

yathethādi . yathā jalaukovatsabhramarāḥ stokastokāni raktatīraladhūni

adantyevaṁ rājā mūladhanamanucchindatā’lpo’lporāṣṭrādāvdikaḥ karo

grāhyaḥ . tamāha pañcāśadbhāgo rājñā grahītavyaḥ . eva dhānyānāṁ

ṣaṣṭho’ṣṭamo dvādaśo vā bhāgī grāhyaḥ bhūmyu tkarṣāpakarṣāpekṣayā

karṣaṇādi kleśalāghavagauravāpekṣo’yaṁ bahvalpagrahaṇavikalpaḥ .

ādadītetyādi . patraśākatṛṇānāmityādi . druśabdo’tra vṛkṣavācakaḥ

vṛkṣādīnāṁ aśmamayāntānāṁ ṣaṣṭhobhāgo lābhādgrahītavyaḥ .

mriyāsāṇaiti . kṣīṇadhano’pi rājā śrotriyabrāhmaṇāt karaṁ na gṛhṇīyāt na

ca tadīyadeśe vasan śrotriyaḥ bubhukṣayā avasādaṁ gacchet . yasmāt

yasyetyādi . yasya rājño deśe śrotriyaḥ kṣudhā’vasanno bhavati

tasyarāṣṭramapi durbhikṣādibhiḥ kṣudhā śīghramavamādaṁ gacchati .

yata evamataḥ śruteti . śāstajñānānuṣṭhāne jñātvā asya tadanurūpāṁ

dharmādanapetāṁ jīvikāmupakalpayet caurādibhyaścainam aurasaṁ

puttramiva pitā rakṣet . yasmāt saṁrakṣyamāṇaityādi . sa ca śrotriyo

rājñā samyagrakṣyamāṇo yaṁ dharmaṁ pratyahaṁ karoti tena rājña

āyurdhanarāṣṭrāṇi vardhante . yaditi . rājā

svadeśaśākaparṇādisvalpamūlyavastukrayavikrayādinā jīvantaṁ

nikṛṣṭajanaṁ svalpamapi karākhyaṁ varṣeṇa dāpayet . kārukāniti .

kārukān sūpakārādīn śilpibhya īṣadutkṛṣṭān śilpinaśca lohakārādīn

śūdrāṁśca dehakleśopajīvino bhārikādīn māsi māsyekaṁ dinaṁ karma

kārayet . nocchindyāditi . prajāsnehāt karaśulkāderagrahaṇamātmano

mūlocchedaḥ atilobhena pracurakarādigrahaṇe pareṣāṁ sūlocchedaḥ

etadubhayaṁ na kuryāt yasmāt ātmano mūlamucchidya

koṣakṣayādātmānaṁ pīḍayet . pūrbārdhāt pareṣāñcetyapi saṁbadhyate

pareṣāṁ mūlamucchidya tāṁśca pīḍayet . bhāra° śā° 87 a°

vistareṇoktaṁ yathā vikrayaṁ krayamadhvānaṁ bhaktañca

saparicchadam . yogakṣemañca samprekṣya baṇijāṁ kārayeta karān .

utpattiṁ dānavṛttiñca śilpaṁ saṁprekṣya cāsakṛt . śilpaṁ prati

karānevaṁ śilpinaḥ prati kārayet . uccāvacakarā dāpyāḥ mahārājñā

yudhiṣṭhira . yathā yathā na sīderaṁstathā kuryānmahīpatiḥ . phalaṁ

karma ca samprekṣya tataḥ sarvaṁ prakalpayet . phalaṁ karma ca

nirhetu na kaścit saṁpravartate . yathā rājā ca kartā ca syātāṁ karmaṇi

bhāginau . samavekṣya tathā rājñā praṇeyāḥ satataṁ karāḥ .

nocchidyādātmano mūlaṁ pareṣāñcāpi tṛṣṇayā . īhādvārāṇi saṁrudhya

rājā sampratidarśanaḥ . pradviṣanti parikhyātaṁ rājānamatikhādinam .

pradviṣṭasya kutaḥ śreyo nāpriyo labhate phalam . vatsaupamyena

dīgdhabyaṁ rāṣṭramakṣīṇabujddhinā . bhūto vatsojātabalaḥ pīḍāṁ sahati

bhārata! . nikāyaṁ kurute vatso bhṛśaṁ dugdho yudhiṣṭhira! .

rāṣṭramapyatidugdhaṁ hi na karma kurute mahat . yo rāṣṭramanugṛhṇāti

parirakṣan svayaṁ nṛpaḥ . sañjātamupajīvan sa labhate na mahat phalam

. āpadarthañca niryātaṁ rājā na iha vindate . rāṣṭrañca koṣabhūtaṁ syāt

koṣo beśmagatastathā . paurajānapadān sarvān saṁśritopāśritāṁstathā .

yathāśaktyanukampeta sarvān svalpadhanānapi . bāhyaṁ janaṁ

bhedayitvā bhoktavyo bhadhyamaḥ sukham . evaṁ nāsya prakupyanti

janāḥ sukhitaduḥkhitāḥ . prāgeva tu dhanādānamanubhāṣya tataḥ punaḥ .

sannipatya sa viṣaye bhayaṁ rāṣṭreṣu darśayet . iyamāpat samutpannā

paracakrabhayaṁ mahat . api cāntāya kalpante veṇoriva phalāgamaḥ .

arayo me samutyāya bahubhirdasyubhiḥ saha . idamātmabaghāyaiva

rāṣṭramicchanti bādhitum . asyāmāpadi ghorāyāṁ sampāpte dāruṇe

bhaye . paritrāṇāya bhavataḥ prārthayiṣye dhanāni vaḥ . pratidāsye ca

bhavatāṁ sarvañcāha bhayakṣaye . nārayaḥ pratidāsyanti

yaddhareyurbalāditaḥ . kalatramāditaḥ kṛtvā sarvaṁ vo vinaśediti . api cet

puttradārāryamarthasañcaya iṣyate . nandāmi vaḥ prabhāveṇa pu

ttrāṇāmiva codaye . yathāśaktyu pagṛhṇāmi rāṣṭrasyāpīḍaya ca vaḥ .

āpatsveva hi voḍhavyaṁ bhavadbhiḥ puṅgavairita . na priyaṁ satataṁ

kāryaṁ dhanaṁ kasyāñcidāpi . iti vācā madhurayā ślakṣṇayā sopacārayā .

svaraśmīnabhyavasṛjedyoga mādhāya kālavit . prākāraṁ bhṛtyabharaṇaṁ

vyayaṁ saṅgrā mato bhayam . yogakṣemañca samprekṣya gominaḥ

kārayet ka ram . upekṣitā hi naśyeyurgomino’raṇyavāsinaḥ . tasmātteṣu

viśeṣeṇa mṛdupūrvaṁ samācaret . sāntvanaṁ rakṣaṇaṁ dānamavasthā

cāpyabhīkṣṇaśaḥ . gomināṁ pārtha! kartavyaḥ saṁbhāgaśca priyāṇi ca .

ajasramupayoktavyaṁ phalaṁ gomiṣu bhārata! . prabhāvayanti rāṣṭrañca

vyavahāraṁ kṛṣintathā . tasmādgomiṣu yatnena prītiṁ kuryādvicakṣaṇaḥ .

dayāvānapramattaśca karān sampraṇayenmṛdūn . sarvatra

kṣemacaraṇaṁ sulabhaṁ nāma gomiṣu . na hyataḥ sadṛśaṁ

kiñcidvaramasti yudhiṣṭhira! . madhudīhaṁ duhedrāṣṭraṁ bhramarā iva

pādapam . vatsāpekṣo duheccaiva stanāṁśca na vikuṭṭayet . jalaukāvat

pibedrāṣṭraṁ mṛdunaiva narādhipaḥ . vyāghrīva ca haret puttrān

sandaṁśenna ca pīḍayet . yathā śalyakavānākhuḥ padaṁ dhūnayate sadā

. atīkṣṇenāpyāyena tathā rāṣṭraṁ samāpibet . alpenālpena deyena

vardvamānaṁ pradāpayet . tato bhūyastato bhūyaḥ krayavṛddhiṁ

samācaret . damayanniva damyāni śaśvambhāraṁ vivardhayet .

pṛdupūrvaṁ prayatnana pāśānbhyavahārayet . sakṛtpāśāvakīrṇāstena

bhaviṣyanti durdamāḥ . ucitenaiva bhoktavyā na bhaviṣyanti yatnataḥ .

tasmāt sarvasamārambho durlabhaḥ puruṣaṁ prati . yathāmukhyām

sāntvayitvā bhoktavya itaro janaḥ . tatastān bhedayitvā tu

parasparavivakṣitān . bhuñjīta sāntvayaṁścaiva yathāsukhamayatnataḥ .

na cāsthāne na cākāle karāṁstebhyo nipātayet . ānupūrvyeṇa sāntvena

yathākālaṁ yathāvidhi 90 a° . prajābhyaḥ karādānaprakāraḥ rakṣā

śabdavakṣyamāṇaprakāravat manūkto’nusandheyaḥ . ataeva sā° kau°

yathā hi grāmādhyakṣāḥ kauṭumbikebhya karamādāya viṣayādhyakṣāya

pramacchanti viṣayādhyākṣaśca sarvādhyakṣāya sa ca bhūpataye

ityuktam . 6 hastākāre hastanakṣatre . hetvādau karmopapade kṛ—kartari

ṭa . tattatkarmakārake tri° yathā karmakaraḥ śreyaskaraḥ yaśaskaraḥ

striyāṁ ṅīp karmakarī dāsī yaśaskarī vidyetyādi . divāvibhādipūrvāt

ahetvādāvapiṭa . tattadupapadārthakārake tri° tāni ca

divāvibhāniśāprabhābhāskarāntānantādibahunāndīkimalipilibilibhaktikartṛc

itranakṣatrasaṁkhyājaṅghābahvahardhanuraruṣaṣu pā° darśitāni

divākaraḥ niśākaraḥ . ahetvādāvito’nyatra aṇ . kumbhakāra ityādi .

दस्र — dasra Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899dasra mfn. accomplishing wonderful deeds, giving marvellous aid (chiefly

said of the Aśvins)

dasra m. N. of one of the Aśvins 601

dasra m. du. the Aśvins

dasra sg. the number 2

dasra mfn. = «-devatā», viii, 9

mfn. a robber, thief.

mfn. an ass (cf. «daśeraka»)

dasra n. the cold season

dasra see «dasma».

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

dasra a. [dasyati pāṁsūn das-rak] Savage, fierce, destructive. —srau (m

du.)

(1) The two Aśvins, the physicians of the gods.

(2) The number ‘two’. —sraḥ

(1) An ass.

(2) A robber. —sraṁ

(1) The cold season.

(2) The lunar mansion Aśvinī.

— Comp.

—devatā the constellation Aśvinī.

—sūḥ f. wife of the sun and mother of the Aśvins, = saṁjñā q. v.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

dasra (vgl. daṁsana, daṁsas, daṁsu, daṁsiṣṭha, dasma) UṆĀDIS. 2, 13.

adj. «wunderthätig, wunderbar helfend»; hauptsächlich von den Aśvin

gebraucht, aber nur im nom. und voc.: dasrā daṁsiṣṭhā rathyā rathītamā

ṚV. 1, 182, 2. ubhā hi dasrā bhiṣajā mayobhuvobhā dakṣasya vacaso

babhūvathuḥ 8, 75, 1. 26, 6. 76, 7. 6, 62, 5. 10, 40, 14 u.s.w. voc. 1, 30,

17. 180, 5. 4, 43, 4. 7, 68, 1 u. s. w. voc. du. von Indra-Viṣṇu 6, 69, 7.

voc. sg. von Pūṣan 1, 42, 5. 6, 56, 4 (womit zu vgl. 10, 26, 1, wo dasrā

schwerlich die ursprüngliche Lesart ist). voc. pl. von den Marut: na vo

dasrā upa dasyanti dhenavaḥ 5, 55, 5. dasrau = aśvinau AK. 1, 1, 1, 47.

TRIK. 1, 1, 65. H. 182. an. 2, 430. Daher zur Bez. «der Zahl zwei»

SŪRYAS. 1, 30. 31. 33 (dasraka). In dasrādīnām 8, 9 bezeichnet das Wort

das Nakshatra Aśvinī. Dasra sg. als N. pr. des einen der beiden Aśvin (der

andere heisst Nāsatya) BṚHADD. in Z. f. vgl. Spr. 1, 442. MBH. 1, 723. 8,

4594. 12, 7583. HARIV. 601. H. ś. 34. MED. r. 47. Nach H. an. und MED.

m. «Esel», nach UJJVAL. «Räuber, Dieb» (vgl. dasyu)ḥ nach UṆĀDIVṚ. im

SAṁKṢIPTAS. (ŚKDR.) n. «die kalte Jahreszeit» (śiśiram).

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

dasra The first of the gods called the Aśvinīdevas. The two gods Dasra

and Nāsatya are known by the collective name Aśvinīdevas. (M.B. Śānti

Parva, Chapter 208, Stanza 17).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

dasra dasra, adj.

1. Helping(?), Chr. 295, 16 = Rigv. i. 92, 16.

2. The name of one of the Aśvins, MBh. 1, 723.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

dasra a. = dasma; m. du. the two Acvins.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

dasra das-ra, a. working wonders; m. N. of on of the Asvins.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

dasra puṁstrī° dasyati pāṁsūn dasa utkṣape rak . 1 gardhabhe striyāṁ

jātitvāt ṅīṣ . dasyati rīgān kṣipati dasa upakṣepe . 2

aśvinīkumārayordvayoḥ dvi° va° . tattulyasaṁkhyatvāt 3

dvitvasaṁkhyāyāṁ 4 tatsaṁkhyeye ca tadadhiṣṭhātṛkatvāt 5

aśvinīnakṣatre ca medi° . anusasratustamatha dasrayoḥ sutau māghaḥ .

tayormadhye viśeṣa vācitve ekavacanānto’yaṁ nāsatyaścaiva dasraśca

smṛtau dvāvaśvināmapi . mārtaṇḍasyātmajāvetāvaṣṭamasya

mahātmanaḥ bhā° śā° 208 . devau tasyāmajāyetāmaśvinau bhiṣajāṁ

varau . nāsatyaścaiva dasraśca smṛtau dvāvaśvināviti hariva° 9 a° .

nāsatyadasrayordvanvacāritvāt dvivacanāntatā 6 hiṁsre tri° . 7 śiśire na°

saṁkṣiptasāraḥ .

दृश् — dṛś Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899dṛś (Pres. forms supplied by «paś» q.v.; pf. P. «dadarśa» &c. [2 sg.

«dadarśitha» and «dadraṣṭha» ; ā. «dadṛśe» [«dadṛśe», 3pl. «-dṛśre» ; «-

śrire» ; p. P. «dadṛśvas» ; «-sivas» ; «darśivas» q.v.; ā. «dadṛśāna» ; fut. P.

«-drakṣyati» &c.; ā. «-ṣyate» and fut. 2. «draṣṭā» ; aor. P. «adarśam, -śas,

-śat», 3 pl. «-śur» ; 1 pl. «adarśma» ; «adṛśma» ; Subj. «darśam, -śat, —

śathas» ; ā. 3 pl. «adṛśran» ; «-śram» ; p. «dṛśāna» or «dṛśāna» [cf. s.v.] ;

P. «dṛśan», 3 pl. «adṛśan» ; Pot. «dṛśeyam» ; «-śema» ; P. «adrākṣit» and

«adrāk» ; ā. 3 pl. «adṛkṣata»; Subj. 2 sg. «dṛkṣase» ; inf. «dṛśe» and

«driśaye» ; «draṣṭum» &c.; ind. p. «dṛṣṭvā» &c. [ also «dṛśya»], «-ṭvāya» ;

«-dṛśya» ; «-darśam» to see, behold, look at, regard, consider &c.; to see

i.e. wait on, visit ; to see with the mind, learn, understand &c.; to notice,

care for, look into, try, examine ; to see by divine intuition, think or find

out, compose, contrive (hymns, rites, &c.) Pass. «dṛśyate» (ep. also «-ti»)

aor. «adarśi» &c. to be seen, become visible, appear &c.; to be shown or

manifested, appear as («iva»), prove &c.: Caus. P. ā. «darśayati, -te»

&c.; aor. «adīdṛśat» ; «adadarśat» , to cause to see or be seen, to show a

thing (ā. esp. of something belonging to one’s self) or person (P. and ā.

with or scil. «ātmānam», also one’s self), to (acc. &c.; gen. &c.; dat.

&c.; instr. after ā. refl. ; to show = prove, demonstrate &c.; to produce

(money) i.e. pay ; (a witness), 158: Desid. ā. «dīdṛkṣate» (ep. also «-ti»)

to wish to see, long for (acc.) &c.: Desid. of Caus. «didarśayiṣati», to

wish to show ; «adidarśayiṣīt» Intens. «darīdṛśyate», to be always visible

; «darīdarṣṭi» or «dard-» ‘tarhjan’.]

dṛś m. (nom. «k», Ved. «ṅ» seeing, viewing, looking at

m. knowing, discerning &c. (ifc. cf. «āyurveda-d-, diṣṭa-d-, pṛthag-d-,

mantra-d-, sama-d-, sarva-d-, sūryad-«)

dṛś f. sight, view (dat. «dṛśe» as inf. cf. 1 «dṛś»)

dṛś f. look, appearance (in «ī-d-, kī-d-, tā-d-«)

dṛś f. the eye &c. (also n.

dṛś f. theory, doctrine

dṛś f. (astrol.) the aspect of a planet or the observed spot. [Cf. Gk.

[greek] for [characters] in [characters]. ]

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

dṛś 1 P. (paśyati, dadarśa, adarśat, adrākṣīt, drakṣyati, draṣṭuṁ, dṛṣṭa)

(1) To see, look at, observe, view, behold, perceive; drakṣyasi

bhrātṛjāyāṁ Me. 10, 19; R. 3. 42.

(2) To look upon, regard, consider; ātmavatsarvabhūteṣu yaḥ paśyati

sa paṁḍitaḥ Chāṇ. 5; Pt. 1. 58.

(3) To visit, wait or call upon; pratyudyayau muniṁ draṣṭuṁ

brahmāṇamiva vāsavaḥ Rām.

(4) To perceive with the mind, learn, know, understand; Ms. 1. 110,

12. 23.

(5) To inspect, discover.

(6) To search, investigate, examine, decide; Y. 1. 327, 2. 305.

(7) To see by divine intuition; ṛṣirdarśanātstomān dadarśa Nir.

(8) To look helplessly on (without power to prevent what is taking

place). —Pass. (dṛśyate)

(1) To be seen or perceived, become visible or manifested; tava

taccāru vapurna dṛśyate Ku. 4. 18, 3; R. 3. 40; Bk. 3. 19; Me. 112.

(2) To appear or look like, seem, look; R. 3. 34.

(3) To be found or seen, occur (as in a book &c.);

dvitīyāmreḍitāṁteṣu tato’nyatrāpi dṛśyate Sk.; iti prayogo bhāṣye dṛśyate.

(4) To be considered or regarded; sāmānyapratipattipūrvakamiyaṁ

dāreṣu dṛśyā tvayā S. 4. 16. —Caus. (darśayati-te)

(1) To cause any one (acc., dat. or gen.) to see anything (acc.), to

show, point out; darśaya taṁ caurasiṁhaṁ Pt. 1; darśayati bhaktān

hariṁ Sk.; pratyabhijñānaratnaṁ ca rāmāyādarśayatkṛtī R. 12. 64; 1. 47;

13. 24; Ms. 4. 59.

(2) To prove, demonstrate; Bk. 15. 12.

(3) To exhibit, display, make visible; tadeva me darśaya deva rūpaṁ

Bg. 11. 45.

(4) To produce (as in a court of justice); Ms. 8. 158.

(5) To adduce (as evidence); atra śrutiṁ darśayati.

(6) (Atm.) To show oneself, appear, show oneself or anything

belonging to oneself; bhavo bhaktān darśayate Sk. (i. e. svayameva);

svāṁ gṛhe’pi vanitāṁ kathamāsyaṁ thīnimīli khalu darśayitāhe N. 5. 71;

sa saṁtataṁ darśayate gatasmayaḥ kṛtādhipatyāmiva sādhu baṁdhutāṁ

Ki. 1. 10; Ku. 4. 25. —Desid. (didṛkṣate) To wish or desire to see.

dṛś a. (At the end of comp.)

(1) Seeing, superintending, surveying, viewing.

(2) Discerning, knowing.

(3) Looking like, appearing. —f.

(1) Seeing, viewing, perceiving.

(2) The eye, sight; saṁdadhe dṛśamudagratārakāṁ R. 11. 69.

(3) Knowledge.

(4) The number ‘two’.

(5) The aspect of a planet.

— Comp.

—adhyakṣaḥ the sun.

—karṇaḥ a snake.

—kṣayaḥ decay or loss of sight, becoming dimsighted.

—gocara a. visible. (

—raḥ) the range of sight.

—jalaṁ tears.

—kṣepaḥ, —jyā the sine of the zenith-distance.

—tulya a. coincident with observation, or an observed place (in

astr.).

—pathaḥ the range of sight.

—pātaḥ a look, glance.

—priyā beauty, splendour.

—bhaktiḥ f. a look of love, an amorous glance.

—laṁbanaṁ vertical parallax.

—viṣaḥ a snake.

—vṛttaṁ a vertical circle.

—śaktiḥ f. the faculty of perception.

—śrutiḥ a snake, serpent.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

dṛś (= darś), nom. dṛk, ved. dṛṅ P. 7, 1, 83. VOP. 3, 134. 1) adj. «der da

sieht, schaut, anschaut, erschaut», = draṣṭar und adhyakṣa (wohl

fehlerhaft, da auch das Versmaas gestört ist) H. an. 1, 15. = vīkṣaka

MED. ś. 7. = jñātar AK. 3, 4, 28, 219. ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. rūpaṁ dṛśyaṁ

locanaṁ dṛgdṛśyaṁ ca dṛkca mānasam BĀLAB. 1. dṛgdarśanaśaktī

JOGAS. 2, 6. sūrya- YĀJÑ. 3, 312. aindradyumne yajñadṛśāvihāvāṁ

vivakṣū vai janakendraṁ didṛkṣū MBH. 3, 10624. sarvadṛśam — ātmānam

BHĀG. P. 4, 22, 9. sama- «der auf Alles gleich sieht» 1, 4, 4. pṛthagdṛś 5,

14. yasya tuṣyati diṣṭadṛk 4, 21, 22. mantradṛśāṁ varīyān 3, 1, 10.

dhanvantariḥ — āyurvedadṛk «der den» Ā. «in seinem Geiste erschaut» d. i.

«verfasst hat» 8, 8, 34. — 2) f. a) «das Sehen, Schauen, Erkennen», =

darśana TRIK. 3, 3, 427. H. an. MED. = jñāna AK. TRIK. = buddhi MED.

pratibandhadṛśaḥ pratibaddhajñānamanumānam KAP. 1, 101. sa ādidevaḥ

— sisṛkṣayaikṣata. tāṁ nādhyagacchaddṛśamatra saṁmatāṁ

prapañcanirmāṇavidhiryayā bhavet.. BHĀG. P. 2, 9, 5. amogha- 1, 4, 18.

5, 13. der dat. dṛśe als infin., s. u. darś. — b) «Aussehen» in ī-, tā- u. s. w.

— c) «aspectus planetarum» (vgl. dṛṣṭi) Ind. St. 2, 256. 263. — d) «Auge»

AK. 2, 6, 2, 44. TRIK. H. 575. MED. kruddhasyāgninibhā ghorā

virejurviṁśatirdṛśaḥ R. 3, 56, 32. CAURAP. 30. KATHĀS. 3, 66. 4, 5. VID.

22. 260. BHĀG. P. 4, 7, 33. naiva tṛpyanti hi dṛśaḥ 1, 11, 26. dṛgruj AK. 3,

4, 5, 29. dīnā dṛṅniḥsvānām VARĀH. BṚH. S. 67, 67. 68, 7. vāṣparuddha-

3, 14. sthūla- 67, 67. BṚH. 2, 8. DEV. 4, 19. na śaśāka tato hartuṁ

dṛśaṁ magnāmivātra saḥ R. 3, 52, 19. nidadhe — khaṅge dṛśaṁ muhuḥ

KATHĀS. 10, 67. saṁdadhe dṛśamudagratārakām SĀH. D. 65, 3. — e) in

der Astr. «der beobachtete Ort» SŪRYAS. 1, 63, v. l. dṛksiddha, dṛktulyatā

2, 14. 3, 11. dṛktulya 11, 6. dṛkkrodha 3. — Vgl. a-, ahardṛś, ī-, kī-, tā-,

tri-, tvā-, divya-, durdṛś, dūre-, mithū-, yakṣa-, yā-, sa-, su-, svardṛś.

dṛś 1) aśeṣa- BHĀG. P. 10, 12, 28. pratyagdṛś, parāgdṛś WEBER, RĀMAT.

UP. 349. — 2) a) tāsāṁ dṛksaṁgamaṁ prāpya «wenn man dazu kommt

sie zu sehen und mit ihnen zusammen zu sein» Spr. 2488. — d) als «Auge»

Bez. der Zahl «Zwei» WEBER, Nax. 2, 382.

dṛś n. «Auge» BHĀG. P. 4, 4, 24.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

dṛś 1. dṛś, i. 1, paśya (for original spaś + ya, i. 4, forms the pres. impfet.

imptive. and potent.), Par. (also Ātm., MBh. 1, 2896; 2830),

1. To see, Rām. 2, 64, 59.

2. To behold, look at, Man. 4, 44.

3. To be a spectator, Man. 7, 92; to look on something (without being

able to prevent it), Rām. 1, 54, 18.

4. To wait on, Lass. 2, 14.

5. To inspect, Man. 7, 120.

6. To live to see, Rām. 1, 1, 88.

7. To discover, Man. 8, 38.

8. To search, MBh. 4, 1172.

9. To learn, Rām. 1, 13, 7.

10. To know, Rām. 1, 57, 20.

11. To decide, Pañc. 165, 7. Passive also with the terminations of the

Par., e. g. MBh. 2345. Comp. ptcple. of the pres. a-dṛśyant, adj.

1. Invisible, Sund. 2, 19.

2. fem. ntī A proper name, MBh. 1, 6757. Ptcple. of the pf. pass.

driṣṭa,

1. Seen, etc.

2. Treated, Pañc. 85, 1.

3. Experienced, Rām. 3, 47, 18.

4. Devised, Nal. 4, 19.

5. Determined, MBh. 13, 11784.

6. Declared, Man. 9, 249.

7. Acknowledged, Man. 8, 3. Comp. a-, I. adj. 1. not seen before,

Rām. 5, 43, 10. 2. unperceived, Man. 5, 127. 3. not approved, Man. 8,

153.

II. n. fate, Bhāṣāp. 160; Pañc. v. d. 27. See ku-. Dus-, adj. unrighteously

decided, Yājñ. 2, 305. su-, adj. looked at eagerly, Rām. 1, 17, 23. Ptcple.

of the fut. pass.

I. darśanīya,

1. Visible, Rām. 1, 67, 6.

2. Beautiful, Pañc. iv. d. 40. Comp. a-, n. invisibility, Pañc. 138, 40.

II. dṛśya,

1. Visible, Rām. 4, 40, 64.

2. To be looked at, Bhartṛ. 1, 86.

3. Worth to be looked at, Ragh. 6, 31. Comp. a-, adj. 1. invisible, Rām.

1, 17, 33. 2. ugly, Arj. 10, 66.

III. draṣṭavya,

1. To be seen, etc., MBh. 13, 1404.

2. Visible, Bhartṛ. 1, 7. Caus. darśaya,

1. To cause to see, to show (with two accus., or acc. and gen., and

acc. and dat.), Rām. 3, 61. 5; Man. 4, 59; Rām. 2, 31, 33.

2. To point out, Śāk. 12, 19.

3. To confess, Rājat. 5, 124.

4. To produce, Man. 8. 158.

5. To pay, 8, 155.

6. To prove, 8, 225.

7. To show one’s self, MBh. 1, 4709 (Ātm.); 1, 6561 (Par.). Anomal.

pteple. of the pres. Ātm. darśayāna, MBh. 1, 17. Desider. didṛkṣa, To

wish to see, Bhāg. P. 4, 3, 11. Ptcple. pf. pass. didṛkṣita, n. Wish to āg. P.

3, 15, 31.

— With the prep.

dṛś 2. dṛś,

I. adj., latter part of comp. adj.

1. Seeing, e. g. sarva- Seeing everything, Bhāg. P. 4, 22, 9.

2. Knowing, Bhāg. P. 8, 8, 34.

II. f. 1. Sight, Bhāg. P. 1, 4, 18.

2. Perception, Bhāg. P. 2, 9, 5.

3. The eye, Bhāg. P. 1, 11, 26.

— Comp. divya-,

I. adj. knowing the celestial phenomena, Varāh. Bṛh. S. 5, 13.

II. m. An astrologer, 54, 31. bhāla-, m. Śiva. mṛga-,

I. adj. having eyes like an antelope.

II. f. a woman, Rājat. 5, 481. mṛgī-, adj. having eyes like a female

antelope. Rājat. 5, 375 (a woman). sama-, adj. equable, Lass. 6, 16. su-,

I. adj. having beautiful eyes.

II. f. a pretty woman.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

dṛś [1] (cf. paś), pp. dṛṣṭa (q.v.) see, behold, know by (instr.); see with

the mind, notice, observe, try, examine; find out, invent (esp. a sacred

song). P. M. dṛśyate (ti) be seen or visible, appear or be regarded as,

pass for (nom.); be found, occur. C. darśayati cause a pers. (acc., gen.,

dat., or *instr.) to see (acc.), show, w. ātmānam one’s self, i.e. appear,

pretend to be; produce, point out, make known as or prove to be (2

acc.); — pp. darśitam (impers.) appearance has been made by (instr.).*

D. didṛkṣate (ti) desire or like to see. —

anu look at (acc.), behold, see (manasā with the mind); P. M. be

seen, appear; C. cause to see, teach, show (2 acc.).

abhi behold, see; P. be seen, appear; C. cause to see, show, betray.

ā M. appear; C. show.

ud C. pp. uddarśitam = darśitam (v.S.).

upa look on, notice, observe; P.M. be visible, appear; C. cause to see,

show, explain; exhibit, pretend, feign.

ni C. cause to see, show, point out, explain, teach, proclaim.

pari see = visit; behold, notice, know, understand, find out; P. be

visible, appear; C. show, explain.

pra P. M. be visible, appear; C. make visible, show, point out, make

known or clear, explain, teach.

saṁpra behold; P. be seen, appear; C. cause to see, show,

ātmānam pretend to be (adv. in vat), point out etc. = prec.

prati behold, notice; P. M. be seen or visible, appear as (nom.); C.

cause to see, show.

vi P. M. be clearly visible, come forth, appear; C. = prec.

sam A. M. behold, observe; P. M. be seen or appear (together),

resemble; C. cause to see, make manifest, show; w. ātmānam etc. =

saṁpra C. — Cf. abhyuddṛṣṭa uddṛṣṭa saṁdṛṣṭa.

dṛś [2] f. (nom. dṛk) seeing, looking; f. the action of seeing, —° look,

appearance; n. eye.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

dṛś DṚŚ, pr. base paśya, 1. see, behold, observe; visit, wait upon; look

at; look on (int.); recognise (by, in.); ascertain; discover; inspect; trouble

about, examine; see with the mind’s eye = compose (hymns); ps. dṛśya,

be seen, become visible; appear, look, turn out to be (nm.); be

inspected; be generally accepted as (nm.), be current in the sense of

(lc.): pp. dṛṣṭa, seen, etc.; observed, treated, recognised, considered;

having appeared, manifesting itself, existing; experienced, suffered;

devised; become acquainted with; foreseen, fore-ordained; decided

(suit); acknowledged, established, sanctioned (by, -°); cs. darśaya,

cause any one to see (2 ac.), show to (ac., d., g.); point with (ac.)

towards (lc.); point towards; produce (in court); display, indicate;

confess; prove; show oneself to (ac., g.);

ātmānam —, show oneself, appear, pretend to be: pp. darśita; des.

didṛkṣa, wish or like to see; des. of cs. didarśayiṣa, P. wish to show.

anu, behold, perceive; cs. inform, instruct.

abhi, look at, see; ps. be seen, appear. ā, cs. show.

ud, cs. appear: pp. -m, (impl.) one has appeared.

upa, look on; observe; ps. Ā. appear; cs. show, present; represent;

pretend; explain, illustrate.

ni, cs. show, set forth; point, indicate; introduce, enumerate; teach,

instruct.

pari, view, frequent; consider, excogitate; ps. be observed, show

oneself; cs. show, demonstrate.

pra, foresee; see, behold; Ā. ps. become visible; appear; cs. show,

display; designate; describe, explain.

upa-pra, refer to (ac.). saṁ-pra, ps. appear; cs. show: ātmānaṁ

mṛtavat-, feign oneself dead.

prati, perceive; ps. Ā. appear: pratyadarśi, has appeared; cs. show.

vi, ps. Ā. be discerned, appear distinctly; cs. show; teach.

sam, behold, perceive; look on; inspect; review; consider fully; ps. Ā.

appear together with (in.); be observed, appear; cs. show, display; show

oneself to (ac.); represent: ātmānaṁ mṛtavat —, feign oneself dead.

dṛś dṛś (nm. dṛk), a. seeing, beholding; f. N. id. (d. dṛśe, for beholding);

eye; view, theory; -°, a. look, appearance.

द्वापर — dvāpara Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899dvāpara «dvā-para» m. n. that die or side of a die which is marked with

two spots

m. the Die personified

m. «the age with the number two», N. of the 3rd of the 4 Yugas or

ages of the world (comprising 2400 years; the Yugas itself = 2000, and

each twilight = 200 years; it is also personified as a god) &c. 111; 433

m. N. of a myth. being

m. doubt, uncertainty

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

dvāpara (dvā + para) m. n. 1) «derjenige Würfel» (dieses

wahrscheinlicher) oder «diejenige Würfelseite, welche mit zwei Augen

bezeichnet ist» (s. den Schol. zu CHĀND. UP. 4, 1, 4 und Ind. St. 1, 285,

N.), VS. 30, 18. TS. 4, 3, 3, 8 (in unserer Hdschr. oxyt.). KĀṬH. 39, 7.

MBH. 4, 1578. 5. 4819. personif. N. 6, 1. — dvāparacchandāṁsi NIDĀNA

1, 5 und -stomāḥ 9 zur Bez. «der Progression um zwei.» — 2) N. «des

3ten» Juga oder «Weltalters, das Weltalter mit den Zweizahlen» (2000

Jahre das Juga selbst, 200 Jahre die Morgen- und eben so viele Jahre die

Abendröthe) AK. 3, 4, 25, 164. TRIK. 1, 1, 112. H. an. 3, 565. MED. r.

169. AIT. BR. 7, 15. M. 9, 301. fg.1, 85. fg. MBH. 3, 12828. fg. HARIV.

513. 516. 11312. fg. VP. 23. BHĀG. P. 3, 11, 18. tretādvāparayoḥ

saṁdhau MBH. 1, 272. 282. 2713 (dvāpare zu lesen). 3, 11250. 12, 2684.

3408. — 3) «Zweifel» AK. 1, 1, 4, 12. 3, 4, 25, 164. H. 1375. H. an. MED.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

dvāpara 1 I A friend of Kali, who went to the Svayaṁvara of Damayantī

accompanied by Dvāpara. (See under Kali).

dvāpara 2 II The deity of Dvāpara Yuga (the age of Dvāpara). (See

under Yuga).

dvāpara yuga YUGA See under Yuga.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

dvāpara dvā-para, n.

1. The die which is maried with two points, MBh. 4, 1578.

2. The third of the four yugas or great periods, Man. 9, 391.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

dvāpara m. the Two-side of the die; N. of the third age of the world.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

dvāpara dvā-para (or a), m. n. die or side of die marked with two points;

also personified; third cosmic age (lasting 2000 years).

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

dvāpara pu° dvau parau prakārau viṣayau yasya pṛṣo° . 1 saṁśaye .

dvābhyāṁ satyatretābhyāṁ paraḥ pṛṣo° . 2 satyatretāyugānantare

yugabhede ca . 3 dvyaṅkasaṁkhyānvitapārśvakapāśake na° ayaśabde 334

pṛ° dṛśyam . dvāparayugamānañca aṣṭau śatasahasrāṇi varṣāṇāṁ

mānuṣāṇi tu . catuḥṣaṣṭiḥ sahasrāṇi varṣāṇāṁ dvāparaṁ yugay

matsyapu° 141 a° . taddharmabhedaśca tatra 143 a° ukto yathā

ata ūrdhvaṁ pravakṣyāmi dvāparasya vidhiṁ punaḥ . tatra tretāyuge

kṣīṇe dvāparaṁ pratipadyate . dvāparādau prajānāntu siddhistretāyuge tu

yā . parivṛtte yuge tasmiṁstataḥ sā vai praṇaśyati . tataḥ pravartite

tāsāṁ prajānāṁ dvāpare punaḥ . lobhodhṛtirbaṇigyuddhaṁ

tattvānāmaviniścayaḥ . pradhvaṁsaścaiva varṇānāṁ karmaṇāntu

viparyayaḥ . yātrā badhaḥ parodaṇḍomānodarpo’kṣamā balam . tathā

rajastamobhūtaḥ pravṛtte dvāpare punaḥ . ādye kṛte nādharmo’sti sa

tretāyāṁ pravartitaḥ . dvāpare vyākulobhūtvā kalau dharmaḥ praṇaśyati .

varṇānāṁ dvāpare dharmāḥ saṅkīryante tathā»śramāḥ .

dvaidhamutpadyate caiva yuge tasmin śrutismṛtau . dvidhā śrutiḥ

smṛtiścaiva niścayo nādhigamyate . aniścayāvagamanāddharmatattvaṁ

na vidyate . dharmatattve hyavijñāte matibhedastu jāyate . parasparaṁ

vibhinnāste dṛṣṭīnāṁ vibhrameṇa tu . ato dṛṣṭivibhinnaistaiḥ

kṛtamatyākulantridam . eko vedaścatuṣpādaḥ saṁhṛtya tu punaḥ punaḥ .

saṁkṣe pādāyuṣaścaiva vyasyate dvāparetviha . vedaścaikaścaturdhā tu

vyasyate dvāparādiṣu . ṛṣiputraiḥ punarvedā bhidyante dṛṣṭivibhramaiḥ .

te tu brāhmaṇavinyāsaiḥ svarakramaviparyayaiḥ . saṁhitā

ṛgyajuḥsāmnāṁ saṁhṛtāstairmaharṣibhiḥ . sāmānyādvaikṛtāccaiva

dṛṣṭibhinnaiḥ kvacit kvacit . brāhmaṇaṁ kalpasūtrāṇi

bhāṣyavidyāstathaiva ca . anye tu prasthitāstānvai kecittān

pratyavasthitāḥ . dvāpareṣu pravartante bhinnārthaistaiḥ svadarśanaiḥ .

ekamādhvaryavaṁ pūrvamāsīddvaidhantu tat punaḥ .

sāmānyaviparītārthaiḥ kṛtaṁ śāstrākulantvidam . ādhvaryavañca

prasthānairbahudhā vyākulīkṛtam . tathaivātharvaṇāṁ sāmnāṁ vikalpaiḥ

svasya saṁkṣayaiḥ . vyākulo dvāpareṣvarthaḥ kriyate bhinnadarśanaiḥ .

dvāpare sannivṛtte te vedā naśyanti vai kalau . teṣāṁ viparyayotpannā

bhavanti dvāpare punaḥ . avṛṣṭirbharaṇaṁ caiva tathaiva

vyādhyupadravāḥ . vāṅamanaḥkarmabhirduḥkhairnirvedo jāyate tataḥ .

nirvedājjāyate teṣāṁ duḥkhamokṣavicāraṇā . vicāraṇāyāṁ vairāgyaṁ

vairāgyāddoṣadarśanam . doṣāṇāṁ darśanāccaiva jñānotpattistu jāyate .

teṣāṁ māyāvināṁ pūrvaṁ martye svāyambhuve’ntare . utpatsyantīha

śāstrāṇāṁ dvāpare paripanthinaḥ . āyurvedavikalpāśca aṅgānāṁ

jyotiṣasya ca . arthaśāstravikalpāśca hetuśāstravikalpanam . prakriyā

kalpasūtrāṇāṁ bhāṣyavidyāvikalpanam . smṛtiśāstraprabhedāśca

prasthānāni pṛthak pṛthak . dvāpareṣvabhivartante matibhedāstathā

nṛṇām . manasā karmaṇā vācā kṛcchādvārtā prasidhyati . dvāpare

sarvabhūtānāṁ kālaḥ kleśaparaḥ smṛtaḥ . lobho

dhṛtirbaṇigyuddhantattvānāmaviniścayaḥ . vedaśāstrapraṇayanaṁ

varṇānāṁ saṅkarastathā . varṇā»śramaparidhvaṁsaḥ kāmadveṣau

tathaiva ca . kāriṣyate paribhavaḥ kalinā nalasya . tāṁ dvāparastu

matanūmadunot purastāt . bhaimīnalopayamanaṁ piśunau sahete na

dvāparaḥ kila kaliśca yuge jagatyām naiṣa0

द्वित्व — dvitva Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899dvitva «dvi-tva» n. = duality (phil.)

n. dual

n. reduplication, 8ch. on i, 1, 58, 59 &c.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

dvitva (von dvi) n. 1) «Zweizahl»: dvitvaprabhatayaḥ saṁkhyāḥ KAṆĀDA

1, 25. TARKASAṁGR. 15. BHĀṢĀP. 88. 106. — 2) «Dual» AK. 2, 9, 84. —

3) «Verdoppelung, Reduplication» Schol. zu P. 1, 1, 58. 59. 2, 4, 75. 8, 4,

46. VOP. 26, 155.

dvitva 1) «Zweiheit, der Begriff Zwei» SARVADARŚANAS. 107, 8. fgg.

108, 2. fgg. 2) Cit. beim Schol. zu AV. PRĀT. S. 261 (I, 6. 7).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

dvitva dvi + tva. n. The number Two, Bhāṣāp. 88.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

dvitva n. doubleness, duality; dual or reduplication (g.).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

dvitva dvi-tva, n. two; duality; dual; reduplication;

-devatyā, a. sacred to two deities; *-droṇa, n. sg. two droṇas

(measure): in. two droṇas at a time.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

dvitva na° dvayorbhāvaḥ . ayamekaḥ ayageka

ityanekaikatvabodharūpāpekṣābodhajanye dravyaniṣṭhe guṇabhede .

tacca samavāyena vastudvaye pratyekaṁ tiṣṭhati, paryāptisambandhena

tu dvayoreva tiṣṭhati na pratyekam . tadevāpekṣābuddhijanyam tenaiva

imau dvāvityādi vyavahāraḥ . samavāyena pratyekaṁ dvitvasattve’pi na

tena tathā vyavahāraḥ . aulukyaśabde 1587 pṛ°

tadutpattivināśaprakāraśca dṛśyaḥ . dvitvādayaḥ parārdhāntā

apekṣābuddhijā matāḥ . anekāśrayaparyāptā ete tu parikīrtitāḥ .

apekṣābuddhināśācca nāśasteṣāṁ nirūpitaḥ . anekaikatvabuddhiryā

sā’pekṣābuddhirucyate bhāṣā° dvitvādayo vyāsajyavṛttisaṁkhyā

apekṣābuddhijanyā . aneketi . yadyapi dvitvādisamavāyaḥ pratyekaṁ

ghaṭādāvapi vartate tathāpyeko dvāviti pratyayābhāvāt eko na dvāviti

pratyayasambhavācca dvitvādīnāṁ paryāptilakṣaṇaḥ kaścana

sambandhā’nekāśrayo’bhyupagamyate . apekṣābuddhināśāditi .

prathamamapekṣābuddhistato dvitvātpattiḥ . tato viśeṣaṇajñānaṁ

dvitvatvanirvikalpakarūpam . tato dvitvaviśiṣṭapratyakṣam .

apekṣābuddhināśe tato dvitvanāśa iti . yadyapi jñānāntaraṁ na kimapi

trikṣaṇasthāyi yogyavibhuviśeṣaguṇānāṁ svottaravartiguṇanāśyatvāt

tathāpyapekṣābuddhe strikṣaṇasthāyitvaṁ kalpyate anyathā

nirvikalpakāle apekṣābuddhināśāt anantaraṁ dvitvasyaiva nāśaḥ syāt na

tu dvitvapratyakṣaṁ tadānīṁ viṣayābhāvāt vidyamānasyaiva cakṣurādinā

jñānajananopagamāt . tasmād

dvitvapratyakṣādikamapekṣābuddhernāśakaṁ kalpyate . na

cāpekṣābuddhināśāt kathaṁ dvitvanāśa iti vācyam .

kālāntaredvitvapratyakṣābhāvāt . apekṣābuddhistadutpādikā

tannāśastannāśaka iti kalpanāt . ataeva

tatpuruṣīyāpekṣābuddhijanthadvitvādikaṁ tenaiva gṛhyata iti kalpyate .

na cāpekṣābuddherdvitvapratyakṣakāraṇatvamastvita vācyam . lāghavena

dvitvaṁ prati kāraṇatvasyaivocitatvāt . atīndriye

dvyaṇyudāvapekṣābuddhiryoginām .

sargādikālīnaparamāṇvādāvīśvarīyāpekṣābuddhirbrahmāṇḍāntaravartiyogi

nāmapekṣābuddhirvā dvitvādikāraṇamiti . apakṣābuddhiḥ ketyata āha .

aneketi . ayamekaḥ ayamekaḥ . ityākārikā ityarthaḥ . idantu bodhyaṁ

yatrāniyataikatvajñānaṁ tatra dvitvādibhinnā bahutvasaṁkhyotpadyate .

yathā senāvanādāviti kandalīkāraḥ . ācāryāstu tritvādikameva bahutvaṁ

manyante . tathā ca tritvatvādivyāpikā bahutvatvajātiḥ . senādau

cotpanne tritvādau tritvatvādyagraho doṣāt . itthañca itarato bahuleyaṁ

seneti pratītirupapadyate bahutvasya saṁkhyāntaratve

tattāratamyābhāvādityavadheyam muktā° . upa° vṛttau viśeṣaḥ

kaścidukto yathā tadayaṁ dvitvādyutpādavināśakramaḥ .

samānajātīyayorasamānajātīyayordravyayoścakṣuḥsannikarṣe sati

tanniṣṭhaikatvasaṁkhyayoryatsāmānyamekatvatvaṁ

tayonirvikalpakānantaraṁ tadviśiṣṭaguṇabuddhirutpadyate saiva

cāpekṣābuddhistayā tayordravyayordvitvamutpadyate, utpannasya ca

dvitvasya yatsāmānyaṁ dvitvatvaṁ tadālocanenāpekṣābuddhernāśo

dvitvatvaviśiṣṭadvitvaguṇaviṣayā viśiṣṭabuddhiścaikadā bhavati,

tadagrimakṣaṇe ca dvitvaguṇasyāpekṣābuddhivināśaḥ dve dravye iti

dvitvaviśiṣṭadravyajñānañca yugapadutpadyate, tatastasmād

dvitvaviśiṣṭadravyajñānāt saṁskāraḥ . tadayaṁ saṁkṣepa,

utpatsyamānadvitvādhāreṇendriyasannikarṣastata ekatvaguṇa

gatasāmānyajñānaṁ tata

ekatvatvasāmānyaviśiṣṭaikatvaguṇasamūhālambanarūpā’pekṣābuddhistat

o dvitvaguṇotpattistatastadgatasāmānyasya jñānaṁ

tatastatsāmānyaviśiṣṭadvitvaguṇajñānaṁ tato

dvitvaguṇaviśiṣṭadravyajñānaṁ tataḥ saṁskāra

itīndriyasannikarṣamārabhya saṁskāraparyantamaṣṭau kṣaṇāḥ .

vināśakramastu ekatvatvasāmānyajñānasyāpekṣābuddhitovināśaḥ

dvitvatvasāmānyajñānādapekṣābuddhervināśaḥ

dvitvatvasāmānyajñānasya ca dvitvaguṇabuddhitovināśaḥ

dvitvaguṇabuddheśca dvitvaviśiṣṭadravyajñānāt tasya ca saṁskārāt

viṣayāntarajñānādveti . nanvekatvajñānāttadviśiṣṭadravyajñānameva

kathaṁ notpadyate tatsāmagrīsattvāt na hi guṇajñāne sati dravyajñāne

vilambo’sti tathā ca tata evāpekṣābuddhervināśe tannāśācca

tadagrimakṣaṇa eva dvitvanāśa iti dve dravye iti viśiṣṭajñānapūrvakṣaṇa

eva dvitvavināśāpattyā dvitvaviśiṣṭadravyajñānasyānutpattireveti cenna

dvitvādyutpattisāmagyranabhibhūtāyā

evāpekṣābuddhverdravyaviśiṣṭajñānajanakatvaniyamāt phalabalena

kathākalpanāt . nanu tathāpi svajanitasaṁskāreṇaivāpekṣābuddhivināśe

punaḥ sa doṣastadavastha eva, dvitvaviśiṣṭajñānapūrvakṣaṇa eva

dvitvanāśasya sambhavāditi cenna kevalaguṇajñānasya

saṁskārājanakatvāt na hi kevaloguṇaḥ kvāpi smaryate, sarvatra

dravyoparāgeṇaiva guṇasmaraṇāt, nanu bhavatvevaṁ tathāpi

viśiṣṭabuddhikāle’pi dvitvanāśe viśiṣṭapratītyanudayastadavastha eva na

hi vartamānāvabhāsinī viśiṣṭapratītirviśeṣaṇanāśakāle sambhavati

tathā’darśanāditi cenna

viśeṣaṇajñānaviśeṣyendriyasannikarṣatadubhayāsaṁsargāgrahasya

viśiṣṭajñānasāmagyrāḥ prakṛte’pi sambhavāt . yadi tu

viśeṣeṇendriyasannikarṣo’pi mṛgyate tadā pūrvakṣaṇe tasyāpi sattvāt

pūrvakṣaṇavartina eva sannikarṣasya kāraṇatvenābhyupagamāt,

viśeṣaṇaṁ viśiṣṭajñānāgocaro’pi sambhavati,

viśiṣṭajñānajanakajñānaviṣayatvamātrameva hi viśeṣaṇatve tantraṁ natu

viśiṣṭajñānaviṣayatvamapi . upalakṣaṇasyāpyevaṁ viśeṣaṇatvāpattiriti

cennāpratyāyyavyāvṛttisāmānādhikaraṇyasya viśeṣaṇatve tantratvāt

upalakṣaṇantu tadvyadhikaraṇam, evaṁ yadā devadattagṛhe kākavattā

tadā kākoviśeṣaṇaṁ, yadā tu uparibhraman asan tadopalakṣaṇam . evaṁ

sati rūpavati rasa ityādau rūpāderapi viśeṣaṇatvāpattiriti cenna iṣṭatvāt,

tarhi tatrāpi rasovarteteti cenna

viśiṣṭavṛtterviśeṣaṇavṛttitvānāvaśyakatvāt na hi viśeṣaṇaṁ

viśiṣṭamatāvekaṁ tantram . dvitvanāśakāle viśeṣaṇasambandho nāsti

kutoviśiṣṭapratyaya iti cenna atadvyāvṛttereva vaiśiṣṭyapadārthatvāt,

tadbhānantu tatrāpīti na kiñcidanupapannamityācāryāḥ . evaṁ

dvitvotpattivināśavat tritvotpattivināśāvapyūhatīyau .

dvitvamapekṣābuddhināśanāśyam, āśrayanāśavirodhiguṇāntarābhāve

guṇasya sato’vināśitvāt caramajñānavat

caramajñānasyādṛṣṭanāśanāśyatvāt . kvacidāśrayanāśādapi naśyati yatra

dvitvādhārāvayavakarmasamakālaikatvasāmānyajñānam, tadyathā

avayavakarmasāmānyajñāne vibhāgāpekṣābuddhī

saṁyoganāśaguṇotpattī dravyanāśadvitvasāmānyajñāne tatra

dravyanāśāddvitvanāśaḥ, sāmānyajñānādapekṣābuddhināśaḥ,

apekṣābuddhināśasya dvitvanāśasamānakālatvāt

kāryakāraṇasamānamāvāt . yadā tu

dvitvādhārāvayavakarmāpekṣābuddhyoryaugapadyaṁ tadā

dvābhyāmāśrayanāśāpekṣābuddhināśābhyāṁ dvitvanāśaḥ, tadyathā

avayavakarmāpekṣābuddhī vibhāgotpattī

saṁyoganāśadvitvatvasāmānyajñāne dravyanāśāpekṣābuddhināśau

tābhyāṁ dvitvanāśaḥ pratyekaṁ sāmarthyagrahāt . iyañca prakriyā

jñānayorbadhyaghātakatvapakṣe paramupapadyate sa eva ca pakṣaḥ

prāmāṇikaḥ . nanu dvitvatritvādīnāṁ sāmagrīsāmye kathaṁ

kāryavailakṣaṇyaṁ, dvābhyāmekatvābhyāṁ dvitvaṁ,

tribhirekatvaistritvamiti cenna ekatve dvitvādyabhāvāt,

samavāyikāraṇagatameva dvitvatritvādikaṁ tantramiti cenna

dvitvādyutpatteḥ pūrvaṁ tatra dvitvādyabhāvāt tatrāpi kāraṇacintāyā

anivāraṇāt apekṣābuddhāvekatveṣu ca

tādṛśaviśeṣasyānupalambhavādhitatvāt phalabalena tatkalpane vā

dvitvādivyavahāro’pi tata evāstu kiṁ dvitvādinā, adṛṣṭaviśeṣādviśeṣa iti

cedevaṁ sati dvitvārambhikayā’pi sāmamyā kadācittritvaṁ

catuṣṭvañcotpadyetetyaniyamapramaṅgaḥ iti cet atrocyate

prāgabhāvaviśeṣādviśeṣopapatteḥ . tulyayā sāmagyrā pākajānāṁ

rūparasagandhasparśānāmiva . prāgabhāvo’pi sādhāraṇa eveti cenna

svasvaprāgabhāvasyaiva kāryaṁ prati kāraṇatvāvadhāraṇāt . yadā

śuddhayā’pekṣābuddhyā dvitvaṁ dvitvasahitayā tritvamiti neyam,

(avyavasthā) śataṁ pipīlikānāṁ mayā hatamityādau,

samavāyikāraṇābhāve dvitvaṁ tābannotpadyate tathā ca gauṇastatra

saṁkhyāvyavahārodraṣṭavyaḥ . senāvanādau

niyatāpekṣābuddhyabhāvādbahutvamātramutpadyate na tu

śatasahasrādisaṁkhyeti śrīdharācāryāḥ . evaṁ sati

śatasahasrādikoṭikastatra saṁśayo na syāt na syācca mahatī mahattarā

seneti naivamityudayanācāryāḥ . atraivamālocanīyaṁ

tritvādiparārdhaparyantā saṁkhyaiva bahutvam, tadbhinnaṁ vā

saṁkhyāntaram, nādyaḥ senādāvapi śatasahasrādisaṁkhyotpattiniyamāt,

na dvitīyaḥ tritvādivilakṣaṇasya bahutvasyānanubhavāt tathā ca

pratiniyataikatvānālamyanāpekṣābuddhijanitaśatādisaṁkhyaiva bahutvaṁ

śatādyabhivyaktistu tatra na bhavati tādṛśavyañjakābhāvāt . vayantu

brūmaḥ tritvādisamānādhikaraṇaṁ saṁkhyāntarameva bahutvaṁ

tritvādijanakāpekṣābuddhijanyaṁ prāgabhāvabhedādeva midyate

kathamanyathā bahavastāvat santi śataṁ vā sahasraṁ yeti viśiṣya na

jānīma iti . yathaikadravye mahattvaṁ dīrghatvañca

tathaikatraivādhikaraṇe tritvādikaṁ bahutvañca, bhavati hi śataṁ vā

sahasraṁ vā cūtaphalānyānayānīti praśre bahavastāvadānīyantāṁ kiṁ

viśeṣajijñāsayeti . evañca dvitvasahitāpekṣābuddhyā tritvaṁ

tritvasahitāpekṣābuddhyā catuṣṭvamevamuttarottaram . bahutvotpattau

tu nāpekṣābuddhau pūrvapūrvasaṁkhyāviśiṣṭatvaniyamaḥ, ataeva

senāvanādiṣu bahutvamātramutpadyate na tu saṁkhyāntaraṁ

saṁśayastvasatkoṭiko’pi bhavatyeveti .

द्वित्वम् — dvitvam Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

dvitvam

(1) A pair, couple.

(2) The number ‘two’.

(3) Duality.

(4) The dual.

(5) Reduplication.

नेत्रम् — netram Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

netram [nayati nīyate vā anena nī-ṣṭn] 1 Leading, conducting.

(2) The eye; prāyeṇa gṛhiṇīnetrāḥ kanyārtheṣu kuṭuṁbinaḥ Ku. 6. 85,

2. 29, 30; 7. 13.

(3) The string of a churning-stick.

(4) Woven silk, a fine silken garment; netrakrameṇoparurodha sūryaṁ

R. 7. 39 (where some commentators take netraṁ in its ordinary sense of

the ‘eye’).

(5) The root of a tree.

(6) An enemapipe.

(7) A carriage, conveyance in general.

(8) The number ‘two’.

(9) A leader. (10) A constellation, star (said to be. m. only in these

two senses).

— Comp.

—aṁjanaṁ a collyrium for the eyes; S. Til. 7.

—aṁtaḥ the outer corner of the eye.

—aṁbu, —aṁbhas n. tears.

—abhiṣyaṁdaḥ running of the eyes, a kind of eye-disease.

—āmayaḥ ophthalmia.

—utsavaḥ any pleasing or beautiful object.

—upamaṁ the almond fruit.

—auṣadhaṁ collyrium.

—kanīnikā the pupil of the eye.

—koṣaḥ 1. the eye-ball. —2. the bud of a flower.

—gocara a. within the range of sight, perceptible, visible.

—chadaḥ the eyelid.

—jaṁ, —jalaṁ, —vāri n. tears.

—paryaṁta a. as far as the eye, up to the eye. (

—taḥ) the outer corner of the eye.

—piṁḍaḥ 1. the eye-ball. —2. a cat.

—malaṁ the mucus of the eyes.

—muṣ a. stealing or captivating the eye.

—yoniḥ 1. an epithet of Indra (who had on his body a thousand

marks resembling the female organ inflicted by the curse of Gautama).

—2. the moon.

—raṁjanaṁ a collyrium.

—roman n. the eyelash.

—vastiḥ m. f. a clyster-pipe with a bag.

—vastraṁ a veil over the eye, the eyelid.

—viṣ f. excretion of the eyes.

—staṁbhaḥ rigidity of the eyes.

पक्ष — pakṣa Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pakṣa m. (ifc. f. «ā» or «ī») a wing, pinion (in one passage n.) &c. &c.

m. a symbol. N. of the number two

m. a feather, the feathers on both sides of an arrow (cf. «gārdhra-p-«)

m. the fin of a fish (cf. «nis-tvak-p-«)

m. the shoulder

m. the flank or side or the half of anything &c. &c.

m. the side or wing of a building

m. the wing or flank of an army

m. the half of a lunar month (the first half from new moon to full moon

was called «pūrva» or «apūryamāṇa», later «śukla» or «śuddha»; the other

half «apara» or «apa-kṣīyamāṇa», later «kṛṣṇa» or «tāmisra»; each

fortnight consists of 15 Tithis or lunar days called «prathamā, dvitīyā»

&c.) &c.

m. a side, party, faction

m. multitude, number, troop, set, class of beings

m. partisan, adherent, follower, friend («śatru-» «the enemy’s side» or

«a partisan of the enemy»; «mahā-«, «one who has many adherents») &c.

m. side i.e. position, place, stead («-kṣe» ifc. instead of or by way of)

m. quantity (see «keśa-«)

m. one of two cases or one side of an argument, an alternative («-

kṣe», «on the other hand», with «atra», «in this case», «pakṣāntare», «in

the other case»)

m. a point or matter under discussion, a thesis, a particular theory, a

position advanced or an argument to be maintained (cf. «pūrva-, uttara-«)

m. an action or lawsuit

pakṣa m. (in logic) the proposition to be proved in a syllogism

m. any supposition or view, motion, idea, opinion («mukhyaḥ pakṣaḥ»,

«an excellent idea» &c.

m. the sun on

m. N. of sev. men

pakṣa m. (in alg.) a primary division or the side of an equation in a

primary division

m. the wall of a house or any wall

m. an army

m. favour

m. contradiction, rejoinder

m. the ash-pit of a fire-place

m. a royal elephant

m. a limb or member of the body

m. the feathers of the tail of a peacock, a tail

m. proximity, neighbourhood

m. a bracelet

m. purity, perfection

pakṣa mfn. = «pācaka, bādhaka» on ‘fahs’; Angl.Sax. ‘feax’.]

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

pakṣa UṆĀDIS. 3, 69. m. 1) «Flügel, Fittig, Schwinge» AK. 2, 5, 36. 3, 4,

25, 181. H. 1318. MED. sh. 18. 19. HALĀY. 2, 84. 5, 63. VAIJ. in den

Scholl. zu KIR. 14, 31 und ŚIŚ. 2, 117. 11, 7. 20, 11. śyenasya ṚV. 1, 163,

1. 8, 34, 9. pakṣo vayo yathopari vyāsme śarma yacchata 47, 2. 3. 1, 166,

10. AV. 6, 8, 2. 10, 8, 18. ŚAT. BR. 4, 1, 2, 26. 10, 2, 1, 1. 5. M. 3, 241. R.

1, 55, 10. DAŚ. 1, 16. MṚCCH. 146, 21. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 44 (43), 10. 94,

9. 11. 45. RĀJA-TAR. 4, 52 (zugleich «Partei»). einer Biene RAGH. 12,

102. Spr. 822. parvatānāmindraḥ pakṣānacchinat KĀTH. 36, 7. HARIV.

12599. fg. BHARTṚ. 2, 29. VIKR. 44. RAGH. 3, 42. 60. 4, 40. 9, 12. BHĀG.

P. 8, 11, 34. neutr.: vidhūya pakṣāṇi MĀRK. P. 9, 15. am Ende eines adj.

comp. f. ā HARIV. 1121. Symbolische Bez. «der Zahl zwei» VARĀH. BṚH.

S. 97, 1. fg. — 2) «die Federn zu beiden Seiten des Pfeils» AK. 2, 8, 2, 55.

H. 781. Vgl. gārdhra-. — 3) «Achsel, Seite» (beim Menschen u. s. w.),

«Seitentheil» oder «Hälfte» (von den verschiedensten Gegenständen); =

pārśva TRIK. 3, 3, 439. H. an. 2, 564. fg. MED. VIŚVA. bei UJJVAL. VAIJ.

divi me anyaḥ pakṣo3 ‘dho anyamacīkṛṣam ṚV. 10, 119, 11. 7. 134, 7.

antareṇa pakṣasaṁdhimātmannupadadhāti ŚAT. BR. 7, 3, 1, 21.

dakṣiṇaḥ, uttaraḥ TAITT. UP. 2, 1. SUŚR. 1, 118, 8. RAGH. 5, 72. eines

Gewandes KĀTY. ŚR. 21, 3, 7. eines Wagens (nach dem Comm. so v. a.

«Räder») TBR. 1, 5, 12, 5. dvāra- «eines Thors» KAUŚ. 36. ĀŚV. GṚHY. 4,

6. «Seitenpfosten» eines Gebäudes AV. 9, 3, 4. dvi-, catuṣpakṣa, ṣaṭpakṣa

u.s.w. 21. daśa- KAUŚ. 135. ulūkapakṣī śālā P. 4, 1, 55, Vārtt. 3, Sch. =

pārśvagṛha «Flügel eines Gebäudes, Seitenhaus» MED. «Flügel, Flanke»

eines Heeres: vāmaṁ pārśvam, dakṣiṇaṁ pakṣam MBH. 6, 2107. fg.

pūrva, dakṣiṇa, paścima, uttara HARIV. 2470. vyūhasya pakṣaṁ savyam

5086. keśa- «Seitentheil des Haupthaares» ĀŚV. GṚHY. 1, 7. dakṣiṇe

keśapakṣe 17. KAUŚ. 53. DRAUP. 9, 2. MBH. 4, 1114. 15, 486. (nach AK.

2, 6, 2, 49. H. 568. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 2, 376 und VIŚVA bedeutet

keśapakṣa «Haarschopf», was für das Epos und die spätere Zeit auch

richtig sein mag). des Citya-Agni (vgl. VS. 18, 52) ŚAT. BR. 6, 1, 1, 3. 6.

7, 1, 2, 13. 2, 2, 8. 10, 2, 1, 4. 2, 7. KĀTY. ŚR. 17, 6, 7. 18, 2, 11. 3, 3.

des Jahresopfers ŚAT. BR. 12, 2, 3, 7. KĀTY. ŚR. 13, 3, 13. 24, 5, 9.

LĀTY. 4, 7, 11. — 4) «Hälfte des Monats (die vom Neumond bis zum

Vollmond» heisst pūrva, āpūryamāṇa. später auch śukla, śuddha; «die

vom Vollmond bis zum Neumond» apara, apakṣīyamāṇa, später auch

kṛṣṇa, tāmisra, tamisra-; jeder «Halbmonat» zerfällt in 15 Tithi, die durch

die Ordnungszahlen im fem. bezeichnet werden.) AK. 1, 1, 3, 12. 2, 7, 47.

TRIK. 3, 3, 439. H. 147. 152. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 1, 50. 5, 63. VIŚVA.

ŚAT. BR. 6, 7, 4, 7. 2, 2, 28. 8, 4, 2, 11. 11, 1, 5, 3, 7, 4. samānapakṣe

TBR. 1, 8, 11, 2. ĀŚV. ŚR. 9, 3. GṚHY. 1.4. 14. KĀTY. ŚR. 7, 1, 26. 15, 1,

18. KAUŚ. 140. śuddha- ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 2, 1, 8. 4, 17, 2. M. 1, 66. 3, 276.

278. 4, 98. 8, 58. 107. 402. 11, 217. YĀJÑ. 3, 50. MBH. 3, 11813. SUŚR. 2,

51, 2. 377, 8. RAGH. 6, 34. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 4, 32 (31). 11, 7. 96, 1.

KATHĀS. 25, 140. PAÑCAT. I, 104. HIT. I, 78. VP. 223. plavaṁgamaḥ

ṣoḍaśapakṣaśāyī HARIV. 8803. In Zusammensetzung mit dem

Vollmondsnamen «die auf diesen folgende Monatshälfte»: phālgunī- LĀṬY.

9, 1, 2. caitrī- 10, 5, 18. 20, 2. māghī- KĀTY. ŚR. 15, 1, 6. 3, 49. vasante

prathamāyāṁ pūrvapakṣasya LĀṬY. 9, 8, 4. pakṣāṣṭamī PĀR. GṚHY. 3, 2.

pakṣāntā upavastavyāḥ pakṣādayo ‘bhiyaṣṭavyāḥ, āmāvāsyena haviṣā

pūrvapakṣamabhiyajeta paurṇamāsenāparapakṣam GOBH. 1, 5, 5. 6.

LĀṬY. 10, 12, 4. pakṣānte VARĀH. BṚH. S. 5, 97. -kṣaye 27,c,20.

pakṣāvasāneṣu 95, 5. pakṣāntau AK. 1, 1, 3, 7. H. 148. M. 6, 20. — 5)

«Seite, Partei, Anhang; Angehörige; Schaar, Klasse von Wesen»:

matpakṣagrāhiṇīṁ nityaṁ sumitrām R. 2, 53, 16. bharatasyāpi vā pakṣaṁ

yo gṛhṇīyāt R. GORR. 2, 18, 13. ahamapi bhavadarthe gṛhītapakṣā PRAB.

70, 6. tatpakṣāśrita P. 3, 1, 119, Sch. pakṣayorubhayorhitam MBH. 1, 507.

pitṛpakṣe ca te pārthā mātṛpakṣe ca vṛṣṇayaḥ. dvau pakṣāvabhijānīhi

tvametau.. 5, 4735. tulyo mitrāripakṣayoḥ BHAG. 14, 25. śatrupakṣa m.

und adj. «die Partei des Feindes, zur Partei des Feindes sich haltend»

MBH. 1, 2709. R. 2, 40, 9. 6, 1, 30. MĀLAV. 9, 9. RAGH. 6, 53. 18, 16.

PAÑCAT. 156, 8. HIT. 24, 4. MĀRK. P. 15, 60. sva- MBH. 2, 171. 1090. 5,

1. 15, 220. MĀLAV. 12, 14. PAÑCAT. III, 55. 156, 9. AK. 2, 8, 1, 30. H.

301. nija- KATHĀS. 11, 82. PAÑCAT. III, 65. para- MBH. 1, 5557. 15, 220.

PAÑCAT. III, 65. dhanuḥ śastraṁ śarā vīryaṁ pakṣo bhūmiryaśo balam.

prāptametanmayā MBH. 2, 666. 984. HARIV. 8431. R. 2, 31, 21. RĀJA-

TAR. 4, 52 (zugleich «Flügel»). 612. mātṛ- MĀRK. P. 21, 101. vara- RAGH.

6, 86. BHĀG. P. 3, 3, 12. patipakṣairnirākṛtā HARIV. 4620. jñātayaḥ

pitṛpakṣāḥ pitṛvyādayaḥ saṁbandhino mātṛpakṣāḥ śvaśurādayaśca KULL.

zu M. 2, 132. mandabhāgyāṁ samātṛpakṣām MBH. 10, 569. mahā- «der

einen grossen Anhang hat» M. 8, 179. KĀM. NĪTIS. 4, 68. a-, -saṁsthita

MBH. 1, 5793. ajāta-, jāta- 7418. fg. devapakṣavarāḥ «die

ausgezeichnetsten Anhänger der Götter» 13, 4158. samastāḥ pūjyapakṣā

vai devādyā mama «Bundesgenossen» MĀRK. P. 21, 53. vijayante dviṣato

yadasya pakṣāḥ VIKR. 16. bharatasyātha pakṣo vā yo vāsya hitamicchati

R. 2, 21, 11. rāmasya pakṣāḥ patitāḥ samudre HARIV. 8423.

pakṣāparapakṣadoṣa wohl «Ereund und Feind» MṚCCH. 137, 15. 20. tatra

vaṁśā vibhajyantāṁ vipakṣāḥ pakṣa eva ca HARIV. 3013. RĀJA-TAR. 6,

220 fg. bandhupakṣa so v. a. bandhavaḥ MBH. 1, 2774. 4396. tiladānena

vai tasmātpitṛpakṣaḥ pramodate 13, 3315. 5, 3780. jñāti- R. GORR. 2, 7,

28. pitṛpakṣāḥ so v. a. «Väter» HARIV. 3374. nāstika- PRAB. 87, 1. santi

vai puruṣāḥ śūrāḥ santi kāpuruṣāstathā. ubhāvimau dṛḍhau pakṣau

dṛśyete puruṣānprati.. MBH. 5, 42. asṛjadbhagavānpakṣau dvāveva hi

pitāmahaḥ. surāṇāmasurāṇāṁ ca dharmādharmau ca.. dharmo hi grasate

pakṣamasurāṇāṁ durātmanām. tathaiva rakṣasāṁ pakṣaṁ surāṇāmeṣa

nirṇayaḥ.. R. 6, 11, 15. fg. teṣāmahaṁ saṁpravakṣyāmi pakṣaiśca kulato

gaṇān MBH. 1, 2601. rudrāṇāmaparaḥ pakṣaḥ sādhyānāṁ marutāṁ tathā

2602. tatpakṣa d. i. dhūrtapakṣa und caurapakṣa «zu dieser Bande

gehörig» HARIV. 7124 fg. -saṁmata «von Einigen gutgeheissen» MBH. 13,

4445. pakṣa = sahāya AK. 3, 4, 29, 222. H. an. MED. VIŚVA und VAIJ. =

sakhi MED. VIŚVA. = parigraha HALĀY. 5, 63. = gṛhya 2, 234. = varga H.

an. pakṣa gleichbedeutend mit gotra, vaṁśa, varga, gaṇa MÜLLER, SL.

379. — 6) «Stelle, Statt»: snuṣāpakṣaṁ hi vāmoru tvamāgamya samāśritā

MBH. 1, 3875. putrapakṣe prajā rājñastavāpi viditaṁ dhruvam R. 6, 99,

32. idamapyupakṛtipakṣe surabhi mukhaṁ te mayā yadāghrātam ŚĀK.

CH. 63, 11. sāṁnidhya- dass.: sāṁnidhyapakṣe haritālamayyāstadeva

(vilocanaṁ) jātaṁ tilakakriyāyāḥ KAMĀRAS. 7, 33. «locum occupavit

notae frontalis, auripigmento pictae» ST. — 7) «der eine von zwei Fällen,

Fall» überh.: pakṣa ekaśrutiḥ «im andern Falle» Schol. zu P. 1, 2, 35. VOP.

9, 55. 26, 58. catvāro ‘tra pakṣāḥ saṁbhavanti «es sind hier vier Fälle

möglich» KAIJJ. zu P. 7, 1, 30. kittvapakṣe und asminnapi pakṣe SIDDH.K.

zu P.1,2,6. pakṣāntare cedyadi ca ced «und» jadi «haben die Bedeutung

falls» AK. 3, 5, 12. TRIK. 3, 3, 465. H. 1542. pakṣāntare «im andern Falle»

KĀŚ. zu P. 1, 2, 36. SĀH. D. 24, 19. nayavidbhirnave rājñi

sadasaccopadarśitam. pūrva evābhavatpakṣastasminnābhavaduttaraḥ

(pūrvaḥ pakṣaḥ = sat, uttaraḥ pakṣaḥ = asat) RAGH. 4, 10. śuklapakṣe

BURN. Intr. 252, N. 1. «dans l’hypothese favorable» BURN. — 8) «Ansicht.

Idee, Meinung»: kasya kaḥ pakṣaḥ MBH. 2, 2266. dhānyairyaṣṭavyamiti

pakṣo ‘smākaṁ narādhipa. devānāṁ tu paśuḥ pakṣo mataḥ 12, 12830. fg.

uttaraḥ sidhyate pakṣaḥ 3, 12708. fg. ityekapakṣāśrayaviklavatvāt RAGH.

14, 34. prāhuryavanāḥ svatuṅgagaiḥ krūraiḥ krūramatiṁ mahīpatim.

krūraistu na jīvaśarmaṇaḥ pakṣe kṣityadhipaḥ prajāyate.. VARĀH. BṚH.

11, 1. ubhayapakṣasamānakṣematvāt KAP. 1, 46. ukta- Schol. zu KAP. 1,

121. āvayoḥ samānaḥ pakṣaḥ Schol. zu KAP. 1, 70. prathamaḥ ŚAṁK. zu

BṚH. ĀR. UP. S. 273. atrāsaṁtuṣṭaḥ pakṣāntaramāha KĀṬ. zu ŚĀK. 42.

pakṣaṁ kaṁ ca na saṁśrayet BHĀG. P. 7, 13, 7.

svapakṣasthāpanaparapakṣanivāraṇa- MADHUS. in Ind. St. 1, 19, 1 v. u.

mukhyaḥ pakṣaḥ «eine vorzügliche Idee» Schol. zu ŚĀK. 99, 23 — 9) «die

Untersuchung, mit der man so eben beschäftigt ist.» ŚAṁK. zu BṚH. ĀR.

UP. S. 185. RÖER übersetzt pakṣe durch «in our text. in the text» und «in

the course of discussion.» — 10) in der Logik «das Subject eines

Schlusses»: saṁdigdhasādhyavānpakṣaḥ TARKAS. 39. -dharmatā 29.

ZdmG.7, 294, N. 1. BHĀṢĀP. 67. 69. pakṣa = sādhya H. an. MED. VAIJ.

VIŚVA. — 11) prajāpatervratapakṣau (d. i. vratam und pakṣaḥ) N. zweier

Sāman Ind. St. 3, 224. — Die Lexicographen kennen noch folg. Bedd., die

wir nicht zu belegen vermögen: gṛhabhitti «Hauswand» HALĀY. 5, 63.

bhitti «Wand, Mauer» VAIJ. bala «Heer (Flügel eines Heeres?») H. an.

MED. VAIJ. VIŚVA. graha «Gunst» H. an. VIŚVA. virodha «Widerspruch»

(vgl. 7) H. an. MED. VIŚVA. cullīrandhra «Ofenloch», rājakuñjara «ein

königlicher Elephant» H. an. MED. dehāṅga «ein Glied des Körpers» H. an.

dehāvayava («Seite» nach AUFRECHT, aber pārśva wird in H. an. neben

dehāṅga noch erwähnt) HALĀY. piccha «die Schwanzfedern beim Pfauen,

Schwanz» überh. H. an. samīpa «Nähe» HALĀY. vihaga «Vogel», valaya

«Armband», śuddha (masc.!) «rein (Reinheit» WILS.) ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR.

(«in algebra) a primary division» HAUGHT. («in arithmetic) side of an

equation in a primary division» WILS. Die Bed. «Haus» im ŚKDR. und bei

WILS. beruht auf der Zerlegung von pārśvagṛha in MED. in zwei Bedd.,

wobei übersehen worden ist, dass pārśva später noch ein Mal getrennt

vorkommt. — Vgl. apara-, uttara-, eka-, kāka-, kṛṣṇa-, krauñca-,

chandaspakṣa, jyotiṣpakṣa, tamisra-, dvai-, pūrva- vi-, vrata-, sa-,

hiraṇya-.

pakṣa 2) vgl. prācīna-. — 5) tadetannāṭakapakṣapatitaṁ tvadvacaḥ

SARVADARŚANAS. 118, 13. — 6) tasmānna vṛttinirodho

yogapakṣanikṣepamarhati «das Stellen —, das Rechnen zu»

SARVADARŚANAS. 164, 2. (sukhasya) duḥkhapakṣanikṣepāt 118, 15. —

7) yuddhaṁ tasya pradīyatām. nirjito ‘smīti vā brūhi pakṣamekataraṁ

kuru «entschliesse dich zu Einem von Beiden» R. 7, 23, 2, 8.

hantavyapakṣe nirdiṣṭā yadi nāma vidhervayam Spr. 3345. — 8)

svapakṣaccheda (zugleich «Flügel», da bhūbhṛt auch «Berg» bedeutet)

KATHĀS. 52, 153. «eine aufgestellte Behauptung, ein aufgestellter Satz»

LA. (II) 90, 7 (zugleich «Flügel).» nijapakṣaprasiddhaye KATHĀS. 77, 15.

uktasvasvapakṣau (zwei Rechtende) 60, 222. — 9) «der in Rede stehende

Gegenstand» SĀH. D. 441. — 10) SĀH. D. 122, 10. 14.

pakṣa vgl. upa-.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

pakṣa See under Kālamāna.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

pakṣa pakṣa, m.

1. A wing; also n., Mārk. P. 9, 15.

2. The feathers of an arrow.

3. A flank, a side, Ragh. 5, 72.

4. Half.

5. The half of a lunar month, comprising fifteen days, Man. 1, 66.

6. Party, Rām. 2, 18, 13 Gorr. (he who sides with Bharata).

7. A partisan, Vikr. d. 16.

8. A friend, Hariv. 3013.

9. A class, a host, a troop, MBh. 13, 3315; Hariv. 7124.

10. Place, condition, Rām. 6, 99, 32.

11. Alternative, Ragh. 4, 10.

12. Opinion, MBh. 2, 2266.

13. The subject of an inference, Bhāṣāp. 67.

— Comp. a-jāta- (vb. jan.), adj. having not yet wings, Rām. 5, 11, 23.

kāka-, m. the side locks of the head of boys and youths, Rām. 1, 21, 9.

kṛṣṇa-, m. the dark half of the month, the fifteen days during which the

moon is in the wane, Man. 3, 276. keśa-, m. a tuft of hair, MBh. 4, 1114.

tri- (m. or n.), three fortnights, Man. 8, 58. pūrva-, m. 1. the first half of a

lunar month, Man. 3, 278. 2. the opponent’s proposition, a primā facie

assertion. 3. action at law, Yājñ. 2, 17. bhūmi-, m. a swift horse. mahā-,

adj. having a great family, Man. 8, 179. vi-,

I. adj. opposed, inimical.

II. m. 1. an enemy, Pañc. 171, 10. 2. an opponent, a disputant. 3. a

negative instance (sādhyābhāvavān), Bhāṣāp. 72; one in which the major

term is not found. śatru-, m. an enemy, Hit. 53, 7, M. M. śukla-, m. the

light half of the month, from new to full moon. sa-,

I. adj. 1. winged. 2. having a side or party.

II. m. a similar instance, one in which the major term is found

(sādhyavān), Bhāṣāp. 72.

III. m. a partisan. sva-, m. a friend, Pañc. iii. d. 55.

— Cf. perhaps [greek] in [greek]

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

pakṣa m. wing, feather, flank or side, half, esp. of the month, a fortnight;

party, faction, troop, class; one of two cases, alternative (pakṣe on the

other hand, —° with regard to); supposition, statement, thesis, the

subject of a syllogism; action, law-suit. Abstr. -tā f., -tva n.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

pakṣa pakṣa, m. (n.1) wing, pinion; feathers of an arrow; flank, side; half;

half-month, fortnight (15 days); side, party, following, ally, partisans (sg.

& pl.); host, troop, class; quantity (of hair); place; alternative; case;

opinion, proposition; prosecution (leg.); subject of an inference (logic);

topic, subject under discussion: pakṣe, in the other case; with regard to

(-°);

atra —, in this case;

tābhyām mukte —, in a case other than these two.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

pakṣa ka parigrahe . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (curāṁparaṁ-sakaṁ-seṭ .) ka,

pakṣayati . iti durgādāsaḥ ..

pakṣa t ka parigrahe . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (adanta curāṁ-paraṁ-

sakaṁ-seṭ .) pakṣayati pakṣāpayati . iti durgādāsaḥ ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

pakṣa parigrahe ada° cu° ubha° saka° seṭ . pakṣayati te apapakṣat ta .

pakṣa parigrahe cu° ubha° saka° seṭ ayaṁ bhyādiśca para° pakṣati

pakṣayati te apapakṣat ta apakṣīt

pakṣa pu° pakṣa—ac . 1

śuklakṛṣṇapratipadādipañcadaśyantapañcadaśatithyātmake kāle 2

khagānāṁ patattre (pākā) 3 śarasya puṅkhasthe pattre . keśāt paraḥ

samūhārthe pakṣapratyayāntaḥ . 4 keśasamūhārthe yathā keśapakṣa

ityādi 5 pārśve 6 gṛhe nyāyokte 7 sandigdhasādhyavati padārthe

pakṣatāśabde dṛśyam yathā parvatī vahnimān . 8 virodhe 9 sahāye 10

vale 11 sakhyau 12 cullīrandhre 13 rājakuñjare 15 khage 16 valaye 17

samūhe 18 picche 19 dehārdhe ca amaramedinyau . 20 vihage 21 śuddhe

śabdaratnā° . 22 varge 23 dehe 24 dehāṅgabhede vādiprativādibhyāṁ

darśitavipratipattau 25 koṭibhede ca .

पक्षः — pakṣaḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

pakṣaḥ [paks-ac]

(1) A wing, pinion; adyāpi pakṣāvapi nodbhidyete K. 347; so

udbhinnapakṣaḥ fledged; pakṣacchedodyataṁ śakraṁ R. 4. 40, 3. 42.

(2) The feather or feathers on each side of an arrow.

(3) The flank or side of a man or animal, the shoulder; staṁberamā

ubhayapakṣavinītanidrāḥ R. 5. 72.

(4) The side of anything, a flank.

(5) The wing or flank of an army.

(6) The half of anything.

(7) The half of a lunar month, a fortnight (comprising 15 days); (there

are two such pakshas, śuklapakṣaḥ the bright or light half, and

kṛṣṇatamisra-pakṣaḥ the dark half); tamisrapakṣe’pi

sahapriyābhirjyotsnāvatonirviśati pradoṣān R. 6. 34; Ms. 1. 66; Y. 3. 50;

sīmā vṛddhiṁ samāyati śuklapakṣa ivoḍurāṭ Pt. 1. 92.

(8)

(a) A party in general, faction, side; pramuditavarapakṣaṁ R. 6.

86; Śi. 2. 117; Bg. 14. 25; R. 6. 53; 18. 17.

(b) A family, race; Pt. 4. 29.

(9) One belonging to any party, a follower, partisan; śatrupakṣo

bhavān H. 1. (10) A class, multitude, host, any number of adherents; as

ari-, mitra-.

(11) One side of an argument an alternative, one of two cases; pakṣe

‘in the other case, on the other hand’, pūrva

evābhavatpakṣastasminnābhavaduttaraḥ R. 4. 10, 14. 34; cf. pūvapakṣa

and uttarapakṣa.

(12) A case or supposition in general; as in pakṣāṁtare.

(13) A point under discussion, a thesis, an argument to be

maintained.

(14) The subject of a syllogism or conclusion (the minor term);

saṁdigdhasādhyavān pakṣaḥ T. S., dadhataḥ śuddhibhṛto gṛhītapakṣaḥ Śi.

20. 11 (where it means ‘a feather’ also)

(15) A symbolical expression for the number ‘two’.

(16) A bird.

(17) A state, condition.

(18) The body.

(19) A limb of the body. (20) A royal elephant.

(21) An army.

(22) A wall.

(23) Opposition.

(24) Rejoinder, reply.

(25) A mass, quantity (when in composition with words meaning

‘hair’); keśapakṣaḥ; cf. hasta.

(26) Place, position.

(27) A view, notion, idea.

(28) The side of an equation in a primary division.

(29) The ash-pit of a fire-place. (30) Proximity, neighbourhood.

(31) A bracket.

(32) Purity, perfection.

(33) A house.

— Comp.

—aṁtaḥ 1. the 15th day of either half month, i. e. the day of new

or full moon. —2. the end of the wings of an army.

—aṁtara 1. another side. —2. a different side or view of an

argument. —3. another supposition.

—avasaraḥ = pakṣāṁta q. v.

—āghātaḥ 1. palsy or paralysis of one side, hemiplegia. —2.

refutation of an argument.

—ābhāsaḥ 1. a fallacious argument. —2. a false plaint.

—āhāraḥ eating food only once in a fortnight.

—udgrāhin a. showing partiality, adopting a side.

—gama a. flying.

—grahaṇaṁ choosing a party.

—ghātaḥ = pakṣāghātaḥ see above.

—caraḥ 1. an elephant strayed from the herd. —2. the moon. —3.

an attendant.

—chid m. an epithet of Indra (clipper of the wings of mountains);

Ku. 1. 20.

—jaḥ the moon.

—dvayaṁ 1. both sides of an argument. —2. ‘a couple of fortnights’,

i. e. a month.

—dvāraṁ a side-door, private entrance.

—dhara a. 1. winged. —2. adhering to the party of one, siding with

any one. (

—raḥ) 1. a bird. —2. the moon. —3. a partisan. —4. an elephant

strayed from the herd.

—nāḍī a quill.

—pātaḥ 1. siding with any one. —2. liking, desire, love, affection

(for a thing), bhavaṁti bhavyeṣu hi pakṣapātāḥ Ki. 3. 12, Ve. 3. 10; U. 5.

17; ripupakṣe baddhaḥ pakṣapātaḥ Mu. 1. —3. attachment to a party,

partisanship, partiality; pakṣapātamatra devī manyate M. 1; satyaṁ janā

vacmi na pakṣapātāt Bh. 1. 47. —4. falling of wings, the moulting of birds.

—5. a partisan.

—pātitā —tvaṁ 1. partisanship, adherence to a side or party. —2.

friendship, fellowship. —3. movement of the wings; N. 2. 52.

—pātin a. or s. 1. siding with, adhering to, a party, attached or

partial (to a particular cause); pakṣapātino devā api pāṁḍavānāṁ Ve. 3.

—2. sympathizing; Ve. 3. —3. a follower, partisan, friend; yaḥ

surapakṣapātī V. 1.

—pāliḥ a private door.

—puṭaḥ a wing.

—poṣaṇa a. factious, promoting quarrels.

—biṁduḥ a heron.

—bhāgaḥ 1. the side or flank. —2. especially, the flank of an

elephant.

—bhukti f. the course traversed by the sun in a fortnight.

—mūlaṁ the root of a wing.

—vādaḥ 1. an exparte statement. —2. stating a case, expression of

opinion.

—vāhanaḥ a bird.

—vyāpin a. 1. embracing the whole of an argument. —2. pervading

the minor term.

—hata a. paralysed on one side.

—haraḥ a bird.

—homaḥ 1. a sacrificial rite lasting for a fortnight. —2. a rite to be

performed every fortnight.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

pakṣaḥ puṁ, (pakṣyate parigṛhyate devapitṛkāryārthaṁ yaḥ . yadvā,

pakṣyate candrasya pañcadaśānāṁ kalānāmāpūraṇaṁ kṣayo vā yena .

pakṣa + ghañ . yadvā, paṇate iti . paṇa stutyādau gṛdhipaṇyordakauca .

uṇāṁ 3 . 69 . iti saḥ kaścāntādeśaḥ .) pañcadaśāhorātrāḥ . sa ca

dvividhaḥ . śuklapakṣaḥ pūrbasaṁjñaḥ kṛṣṇapakṣo’parasaṁjñaḥ .

tadbhedena vyavasthā yathā .

śuklapakṣe tithirgrāhyā yasyāmabhyudito raviḥ .

kṛṣṇapakṣe tithirgrāhyā yasyāmastamito raviḥ ..

atrāmāvāsyāvattithikṣayavṛddhibhyāṁ na vyavasthā kintu

raverudayāstamayasambandhācchuklakṛṣṇapakṣābhyāṁ vyavasthā sā ca

yugmādyanāghrātatithikarmaparā sāmānyaviśeṣanyāyāt . iti

tithyāditattvam .. pakṣiṇāmavayavaviśeṣaḥ . pākhā iti bhāṣā . tatparyāyaḥ

. garut 2 chadaḥ 3 patram 4 patatram 5 tanūruham 6 .. śarapakṣaḥ .

tīrera pākhā iti bhāṣā . tatparyāyaḥ . vājaḥ 2 . sahāyaḥ . kacāt pare

samūhārthaḥ . yathā keśapakṣaḥ . ityamaraḥ .. (mahākālaḥ śivaḥ .

kālopādhibhedāt pakṣasya tathātvam . yathā mahābhārate . 13 .

śivasahasranāmakīrtane . 17 . 139 .

ṛtuḥ saṁvatsaro māsaḥ pakṣaḥ saṁkhyā samāpanaḥ ..) pārśvaḥ .

gṛham . sādhyam . (sandigdhasādhyavān padārthaḥ . yathā,

bhāṣāparicchede . 70 . 71 .

siṣādhayiṣayā śūnyā siddhiryatra na vidyate .

sa pakṣastatra vṛttitvajñānādanumitirbhavet ..) virodhaḥ . balam .

(yathā, pañcatantre . 3 . 66 .

yastīrthāni nije pakṣe parapakṣe viśeṣataḥ .

guptaiścarairnṛpo vetti na sa durgatimāpnuyāt ..) sakhā .

cullīrandhram . rājakuñjaraḥ . iti medinī .. vihagaḥ . valayam . śuddhaḥ .

iti śabdaratnāvalī .. vargaḥ . (sajātīyavṛndam . yathā, goḥ rāmāyaṇe . 2 .

18 . 13 .

bharatasyāpi vā pakṣaṁ yo gṛhṇīyādacetanaḥ .

taṁ pāpamahamadyaiva preṣayāmi yamakṣayam ..) piccham .

dehāṅgam . iti hemacandraḥ ..

pakṣaḥ [s] klī, (pacatīti . pacivacibhyāṁ suṭ ca . uṇāṁ . 4 . 219 . iti asun

suṭ ca .) garut . yathā . pakṣasī ca smṛtau pakṣau . iti

bharatadhṛtaśubhāṅkaḥ ..

पक्षक — pakṣaka Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pakṣaka m. a wing (ifc.; cf. «sa-«)

m. N. of the number two

m. a fan

m. a side door

m. a side

m. a partisan

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

pakṣaka (von pakṣa) m. 1) «Seitenthür» AK. 2, 2, 13. H. 1007. an. 3, 60.

MED. k. 113. — 2) «Seite» H. an. MED. ŚIŚ. 11, 7. — 3) «Bundesgenosse,

Gehülfe» ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — Am Ende eines adj. comp. s. sapakṣaka.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

pakṣaka pakṣa + ka,

I. m. A side, Śiś. 11, 7.

II. A substitute for pakṣa when latter part of a comp. adj.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

pakṣaka (adj. —°) wing.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

pakṣaka pakṣa-ka, m. wing (-°); side;

-kṣaya, m. end of a fortnight;

-gama, a. moving with wings, flying;

-grahaṇa, n. taking the side of (g.);

-cara, m. elephant parted from the herd;

-cchid, a. having clipped the wings of the mountains, ep. of Indra;

-tā, f. alliance; being the subject of an inference.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

pakṣaka pu° pakṣa iva kāyati kai—ka . 1 pārśvadvāre (khiḍakī) amaraḥ . 3

pārśvamātre gedi° . 3 sahāye śabdara° .

यम — yama Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899yama m. a rein, curb, bridle

m. a driver, charioteer

m. the act of checking or curbing, suppression, restraint (with

«vācām», restraint of words, silence)

m. self-control forbearance, any great moral rule or duty (as opp. to

«niyama», a minor observance; in ten Yamas are mentioned, sometimes

only five) &c.

yama m. (in Yoga) self-restraint (as the first of the eight Aṅgas or

means of attaining mental concentration) 93

m. any rule or observance

yama m. («yama») mf («ā» or «ī») n. twin-born, twin, forming a pair &c.

&c.

yama m. a twin, one of a pair or couple, a fellow (du. «the twins» N. of

the Aśvins and of their twin children by Mādrī, called Nakula and Saha-

deva; «yamau mithunau», twins of different sex)

yama m. a symbolical N. for the number «two»

yama m. N. of the god who presides over the Pitṛis (q.v.) and rules the

spirits of the dead &c. &c. 18; 197, 198 &c. 10; 16; 289 &c. (he is

regarded as the first of men and born from Vivasvat, «the Sun», and his

wife Saraṇyū; while his brother, the seventh Manu, another form of the

first man, is the son of Vivasvat and Saṁjṇā, the image of Saraṇyū; his

twin-sister is Yamī, with whom he resists sexual alliance, but by whom

he is mourned after his death, so that the gods, to make her forget her

sorrow, create night; in the Veda he is called a king or «saṁgamano

janānām», «the gatherer of men», and rules over the departed fathers in

heaven, the road to which is guarded by two broad-nosed, four-eyed,

spotted dogs, the children of śaramā q.v.; in Post-vedic mythology he is

the appointed Judge and «Restrainer» or «Punisher» of the dead, in which

capacity he is also called «dharmarāja» or «dharma» and corresponds to

the Greek Pluto and to Minos; his abode is in some region of the lower

world called Yama-pura; thither a soul when it leaves the body, is said to

repair, and there, after the recorder, Citra-gupta, has read an account of

its actions kept in a book called Agra-saṁdhānā, it receives a just

sentence; in Yama is described as dressed in blood-red garments, with a

glittering form, a crown on his head, glowing eyes and like Varuṇa,

holding a noose, with which he binds the spirit after drawing it from the

body, in size about the measure of a man’s thumb; he is otherwise

represented as grim in aspect, green in colour, clothed in red, riding on a

buffalo, and holding a club in one hind and noose in the other; in the later

mythology he is always represented as a terrible deity inflicting tortures,

called «yātanā», on departed spirits; he is also one of the 8 guardians of

the world as regent of the South quarter; he is the regent of the

Nakshatra Apa-bharanī or Bharaṇī, the supposed author of ; 14, of a

hymn to Viṣṇu and of a law-book; «yamasyārkaḥ» N. of a Sāman

yama m. N. of the planet Saturn (regarded as the son of Vivasvat and

Chāyā)

yama m. of one of Skanda’s attendants (mentioned together with Ati-

yama)

yama m. a crow (cf. «-dūtaka»)

yama m. a bad horse (whose limbs are either too small or too large)

yama n. a pair, brace, couple

yama n. (in gram.) a twin-letter (the consonant interposed and generally

understood, but not written in practice, between a nasal immediately

preceded by one of the four other consonants in each class) on

yama n. pitch of the voice, tone of utterance, key

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

yama a. [yam-ghañ]

(1) Twin, twinborn.

(2) Coupled. —maḥ

(1) Restraining, controlling, curbing.

(2) Control, restraint.

(3) Self-control.

(4) Any great moral or religious duty or observance (opp. niyama);

taptaṁ yamena niyamena tapo’munaiva N. 13. 16. (yama and niyama are

thus distinguished: śarīrasādhanāpekṣaṁ nityaṁ yatkarma tadyamaḥ .

niyamastu sa yatkarma nityamāgatuṁsādhanaṁ .. Ak.; see Malli. on Śi.

13. 23 and Ki. 10. 10 also. The yamas are usually said to be ten, but their

names are given differently by different writers; e. g. brahmacaryaṁ dayā

kṣāṁtirdānaṁ satyamakalkatā . ahiṁsā’steyamādhurye damaśceti yamāḥ

smṛtāḥ .. Y. 3. 313; or ānṛśaṁsyaṁ dayā satyamahiṁsā kṣāṁtirārjavam .

prītiḥ prasādo mādhuryaṁ mārdavaṁ ca yamā daśa ..; sometimes only

five yamas are mentioned: —ahiṁsā satyavacanaṁ

brahmacayarmakalkatā . asteyamiti paṁcaite yamākhyāni vratāni ca ..).

(5) The first of the eight angas or means of attaining Yoga; the eight

angas are: —

yamaniyamāsanaprāṇāyāmapratyāhāradhāraṇādhyānasamādhayo’ṣṭāvaṁ

gāni.

(6) The god of death, death personified, regarded as a son of the sun;

dattābhaye tvayi yamādapi daṁḍadhāre U. 2. 11.

(7) A twin; dharmātmajaṁ prati yamau ca (i. e. nakulasahadevau)

kathaiva nāsti Ve. 2. 25; yamayoścaiva garbheṣu janmato jyeṣṭhatā matā

Ms. 9. 126.

(8) One of a pair or couple, a fellow.

(9) N. of Saturn. (10) A crow.

(11) A symbolical expression for the number ‘two’.

(12) Ved. A rein, bridle.

(13) Ved. A driver, charioteer. —maṁ

(1) A pair or couple.

(2) (In gram.) The twin letter of any consonant.

(3) Pitch of the voice. —mī N. of the river Yamunā.

— Comp.

—anugaḥ, —anucaraḥ a servant or attendant of Yama.

—aṁtakaḥ an epithet of 1. Śiva. —2. of Yama.

—ariḥ, —ghnaḥ, —ripuḥ &c. N. of Viṣṇu.

—īśaṁ the Nakshatra Bharaṇī.

—kiṁkaraḥ a messenger of death.

—kīṭaḥ 1. a wood-louse. —2. an earth-worm.

—kīlaḥ N. of Viṣṇu.

—koṭiḥ —ṭī N. of a mythical town to the east of Laṅkā.

—ja a. twin-born, twin; bhrātarau āvāṁ yamajau U. 6; 4.

—daṁṣṭrā ‘Yama’s tooth’, the jaws of death. (

—ṣṭrāḥ pl.) the last eight days of the month Asvina and the whole

of Kārtika (regarded as a period of general sickness).

—dūtaḥ —dūtakaḥ 1. a messenger of death. —2. a crow.

—dūtikā tamarind.

—devatā the asterism Bharaṇī.

—dvitīyā the second day in the bright half of Kārtika when sisters

entertain their brothers (Mar. bhāūbīja); cf. bhrātṛdvitīyā. —dhānī the

abode of Yama; naraḥ saṁsārāṁte viśati yamadhānījavanikāṁ Bh. 3.

112.

—dhāraḥ a kind of double-edged weapon.

—pāśaḥ the noose of Yama.

—puruṣaḥ Yama’s servant or minister.

—priyaḥ the fig-tree.

—bhaginī N. of the river Yamunā.

—yātanā the tortures inflicted by Yama upon sinners after death,

(the word is sometimes used to denote ‘horrible tortures’, ‘extreme

pain’).

—rāja m. Yama, the god of death.

—vāhanaḥ, —rathaḥ a buffalo.

—sabhā the tribunal of Yama.

—sūryaṁ a building with two halls, one facing the west and the

other facing the north.

—svasṛ f. 1. N. of the river Yamunā. —2. N. of Durgā.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

yama (von yam) m. VOP. 26, 170. 1) «Zügel»: pṛṣṭhe sado nasoryamaḥ

ṚV. 5, 61, 2. — 2) «Lenker»: rathānām ṚV. 8, 92, 10. — 3) «das Hemmen,

Unterdrücken»: vācām «Schweigsamkeit» BHĀG. P. 5, 5, 12. = saṁyama

AK. 3, 3, 18. TRIK. 3, 3, 302. H. an. 2, 332. fg. MED. m. 23. = yamana H.

an. — 4) in der Phil. «Selbstbezwingung, das Verbot der Beschädigung

Anderer durch Wort oder That und der Ueppigkeit, ein allgemeines

Sittengesetz» AK. 2, 7, 48. MED. JOGAS. 2, 29.

ahiṁsāsatyāsteyabrahmacaryāparigrahā yamaḥ 30. NĪLAK. 28. TATTVAS.

19. SARVADARŚANAS. 155, 10. 161, 2. 173, 16. fgg. MADHUS. in Ind. St.

1, 22, 22. VEDĀNTAS. (Allah.) No. 128. VP. 288. 653. BHĀG. P. 1, 6, 36.

4, 22, 24. H. 81. H. an. yamānseveta satataṁ na nityaṁ niyamānbudhaḥ

M. 4, 204. MBH. 12, 8913. rājño vivekasya balavato yamādīnamātyān

PRAB. 8, 9. fg. yamaśca daśadhā proktaḥ Verz. d. Oxf. H. 233,b,6.

brahmacaryaṁ dayā kṣāntirdānaṁ (st. dessen fälschlich dhyānaṁ

GĀRUḌA-P. 105 im ŚKDR.) satyamakalkatā.

ahiṁsāsteyamādhuryadamāśceti yamāḥ smṛtāḥ.. YĀJÑ. 3, 313.

ānṛśaṁsyaṁ kṣamā satyamahiṁsā dama ārjavam. prītiḥ prasādo

mādhuryaṁ mārdavaṁ ca yamā daśa.. Spr. 350. «Observanz» überh.

PĀR. GṚHY. 2, 7. — 5) «festgesetzte Ordnung», s. yāma-. — Vgl. prāṇa-,

vācaṁ-, su-.

yama 1) adj. (f. ā und ī) «geminus, von Geburt doppelt, gepaart»; m.

«Zwilling» TRIK. 3, 3, 302. H. 1424. H. an. 2, 232. fg. MED. m. 23. HALĀY.

4, 15. saptathamāhurekajaṁ ṣaLidyamāḥ ṚV. 1, 164, 15 (vgl. AV. 10, 8,

5). 2, 39, 2. yamā cidatra yamasūrasūta 3, 39, 3. yamā iva susadṛśaḥ 5,

57, 4. 6, 59, 2. 10, 117, 9. 1, 66, 4. yame iva yatamāne yadaitam 10, 13,

2. yasya bhāryā gaurvā yamau janayet AIT. BR. 7, 9. agnirvāva yama

iyaṁ yamī TS. 3, 3, 8, 3. yamī vaśā 2, 1, 9, 5. aṣṭau yamā ādityāḥ

NIDĀNA 10, 2. yamau mithunau «Zwillinge verschiedenen Geschlechts»

KĀṬH. 13, 4. NIR. 12, 10. — PAÑCAV. BR. 16, 4, 10. KĀTY. ŚR. 25, 4, 35.

yamāṁ dviguṇāmiva śriyamicchantaḥ ĀŚV. ŚR. 11, 5, 4. ŚAUNAKA in Z. f.

vgl. Spr. 1, 442. putrau prasuṣuve yamau BHĀG. P. 3, 17, 2. 9, 11, 11.

yamau «Zwillinge» M. 9, 126. MBH. 1, 124. 3818. 15694. 7, 68. SUŚR. 1,

318, 7. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 78, 24. KATHĀS. 21, 49. BHĀG. P. 1, 10, 9. 3, 16,

35. yamābhyāṁ supravṛddhābhyāmarjunābhyām HARIV. 3451 (nach der

Lesart der neueren Ausg.). BHĀG. P. 10, 10, 26. n. «Paar» VARĀH. BṚH.

S. 77, 33. yamau heissen die Aśvin H. 182. uṣa uṣo hi vaso agrameṣi

tvaṁ yamayorabhavo vibhāvā «du» Agni «gehst voran jeder Morgenröthe,

du strahltest für die Zwillinge» (nämlich, wenn sie zum Frühopfer

kommen) ṚV. 10, 8, 4. «thou wast the divider of the two twins i. e. of day

and night» M. MÜLLER, Lect. II, 511. yama als Bez. «der Zahl zwei»

SŪRYAS. 1, 32. fg. 2, 19. — 2) m. N. des Gottes, der im Himmel über die

Seligen (pitaraḥ) herrscht, deshalb auch König heisst, ein Sohn

Vivasvant’s. Die nachvedische Zeit sieht in ihm den Beherrscher der

Todten in der Unterwelt und fasst seinen Namen als «Bändiger» (schon

ŚAT. BR. 7, 2, 1, 10. auch von yu abgeleitet TS. 2, 1, 4, 3). Die wirkliche

Bed. ist «Zwilling»: Jama und Yamī sind das erste Menschenpaar. Wie

diese nach der Legende NIR. 12, 10 von Vivasvant mit der Saraṇyū

erzeugt sind, so zeugt derselbe mit dem Abbilde der Saraṇyū den Manu,

eine andere Form des Erstlings der Menschheit. Ueber den ganzen

Mythus vgl. ROTH in ZdmG.4, 425. fgg. und J. MUIR in Journ. R. As. S.

new ser. I, 287. — AK. 1, 1, 1, 54. 3, 4, 7, 33. TRIK. 1, 1, 71. 3, 3, 302. H.

169. 184. H. an. MED. HĀR. 57. HALĀY. 1, 72. 100. 5, 70. 83. ṚV. 10, 14,

1. fgg. 15, 8. 18, 13. yatte yamaṁ vaivasvataṁ mano jagāma dūrakam

57, 7. 60, 10. yasminvṛkṣe supalāśe devaiḥ saṁpibate yamaḥ 135, 1.

tasmai yamāya namo astu mṛtyave 165, 4. āste yama upa yāti devān AV.

4, 34, 3. 4. yamasya jātamamṛtaṁ yajāmahe ṚV. 1, 83, 5. yo mamāra

prathamo martyānāṁ yaḥ preyāya prathamo lokametam. vaivasvataṁ

saṁgamanaṁ janānāṁ yamaṁ rājānaṁ haviṣā saparyata.. AV. 18, 3, 13.

6, 28, 3. yamasya bhavanam ṚV. 1, 35, 6. paḍvīśam 10, 97, 16. yoniḥ

123, 6. lokaḥ AV. 6, 118, 2. 19, 56, 1. sādanam 2, 12, 7. 18, 2, 56. 3, 70.

gṛham 6, 29, 3. rājyam 18, 4, 31. fg Ross 5, 5, 8. Boten 30, 6. śvānau 8,

1, 9. Mutter ṚV. 10, 17, 1. König Jama AV. 8, 10, 23. 15, 14, 7. 18, 3, 69.

1, 14, 2. AIT. BR. 8, 7. ŚAT. BR. 2, 3, 2, 1. KAUṢ. UP. 4, 15. yāvanto vai

mṛtyubandhavasteṣāṁ yama ādhipatyaṁ parīyāya TS. 5, 1, 8, 2. — Jama

und Yamī (Yamunā) HARIV. 552. VP. 266. BHĀG. P.6,6,38.8,13,9. MĀRK.

P. 77,7. 106,4. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 82,b,41. fg. ein jüngerer Bruder Manu’s

MBH. 1, 3136. fg HARIV. 552. MĀRK. P. 108, 15. fgg.

māṇḍavyaśāpādbhagavānprajāsaṁyamano yamaḥ. bhrātuḥ kṣetre

bhujiṣyāyāṁ jātaḥ satyavatīsutāt.. BHĀG. P. 3, 5, 20. yamaḥ

saṁyamatāmaham sagt Kṛṣṇa BHAG. 10,29. pitṝṇāmadhipaḥ MBH.

14,1176. HARIV. 260. VP. 153. — 207. 286. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 61,a,1. fgg.

einer der 8 Welthüter M. 5, 96. im Süden MBH. 8, 2102. R. 4, 51, 32.

yathā yamaḥ priyadveṣyau prāpte kāle niyacchati Spr. 2321. śarīrāntakaro

nṝṇām MBH. 3, 2138. yamo vaivaśvato devo yastavaiṣa hṛdi sthitaḥ Spr.

2406. samatayā — anuyayau yamam RAGH. 9, 6. yamastvannarasaṁ

prādāddharme ca paramāṁ sthitim MBH. 3, 2228. raktākṣaṁ

yamaprabhaṁ vyādham ŚUK. in LA. (III) 34, 17. sarujapada Spr. 803; vgl.

HARIV. 565. fgg. und śīrṇapādayamāya nī BHĀG. P. 9, 6, 17. yamasya

sadanam DAŚ. 2, 35. daṇḍī yamo mahiṣagaḥ VARĀH. BṚH. S. 58, 57. —

matanibarhaṇa Verz. d. Oxf. H. 250,b,37. als Gottheit (Beherrscher) des

Nakshatra Apabharaṇi (Bharaṇi) WEBER JYOT. 94. fg. Nax. 2, 300. 376.

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 98, 4. der 4ten Tithi 99, 1 eines Karaṇa 4. Liedverfasser

von ṚV. 10, 10. 14. Verfasser einer Hymne auf Viṣṇu Verz. d. Oxf. H.

82,b,39. eines Gesetzbuchs YĀJÑ. 1, 4. Verz. d. B. H. No. 140. 322. 1017.

1166. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 14, «a», N. l. 266, «a», 41. 268, «a», 6. 12. 270, «b»,

32. 279, «a», 22. MADHUS. in Ind. St. 1, 20, 21. -saṁhitā GILD. Bibl. 450.

Vgl. kālāntaka-, bṛhadyama, mahā-, laghu-, svalpa-. — 3) m. «der Planet

Saturn» H. ś. 14. MED. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 4, 21. 20, 7. 28, 21. 98, 13. Ind.

St. 2, 278. fg. 283. Verz. d. B. H. No. 1249. auch Saturn gilt für einen Sohn

Vivasvant’s, aber von der ChāyāH vgl. HARIV. 564. BHĀG. P. 8, 13, 10. —

4) m. N. pr. eines Wesens im Gefolge Skanda’s (neben Atijama) MBH. 9,

2547. — 5) m. pl. N. pr. einer Klasse von Göttern bei den Buddhisten

LALIT. ed. Calc. 58, 4. fehlerhaft für yāma. — 6) m. «Krähe» H. an. MED.

Vgl. yamadūtaka. — 7) n. in der Gramm. a) «Zwillingslaut»; so heissen

gewisse von den Grammatikern angenommene «nasale Zwischenlaute

zwischen Mutis und folgenden Nasalen»; vgl. WHITNEY in AV. PRĀT. S.

63. WEBER in Ind. St. 4, 123. ṚV. PRĀT. 1, 10. 49. 6, 8. fgg. 14, 10. 22.

VS. PRĀT. 1, 41. 74. 82. 103. 4. 111. 161. 8, 29. AV. PRĀT. 1, 99. TS.

PRĀT. 21, 8. 22, 12. PAT. zu P. 1, 1, 8. — b) «Tonlage»: samāna- AV.

PRĀT. 1, 14. eka- (= ekaśruti Comm.) TS. PRĀT. 15, 9. dvi- (= svarita

Comm.) 19, 3. 23, 16. caturyama 18. sapta ṚV. PRĀT. 13, 17. — 8) f.

yamī N. pr. der Zwillingsschwester Jama’s. die in der nachvedischen Zeit

der Yamunā gleichgesetzt wird, NAIGH. 5, 5. NIR. 11, 33. TRIK. 1, 2, 31.

H. 1083. ṚV. 10, 10, 7. 9. ŚAT. BR. 7, 2. 1, 10. VS. 12, 63. KĀṬH. 7, 10.

PAÑCAV. BR. 11, 10, 23. ŚAUNAKA in Z. f. vgl. Spr.1,442. HARIV. 609. fg.

VP. 266. BHĀG. P.6,6,38.8,13,9. MĀRK. P. 106,4. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 82,b,41.

fg.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

yama Kāla. (For more details see under Kāla).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

yama yam + a,

I. adj. sbst. Twin, one of a pair. du. The twins, Draup. 6, 29.

II. m.

1. Restraining.

2. Taming of passion, Vedāntas. in Chr. 217, 14.

3. Moral duty, Man. 4, 204.

4. Penance.

5. A festival.

6. Yama, the judge of the deceased ones, ruler of the infernal regions,

Rām. 2, 54, 28; god of death, Pañc. 247, 8.

7. A crow.

8. A name of the planet Saturn.

III. f. mī, The Yamunā.

IV. n. A pair.

— Comp. kāla-anta + ka-, m. Yama, as all-destroying time, Rām. 3, 32, 5.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

yama [1] m. holder, i.e. bridle or driver; restraint, self-control, any

paramount moral duty or observance (ph.).

yama (f. ā2 & ī) paired, twin; m. a twin (du. twins), N. of a god, either

the Twin (with his sister yamī f.) or the Restrainer, the god of death. n.

pair, twin letter (g.)

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

yama 1. yam-a, m. (restrainer), rein (RV.1); driver (RV.1); suppression,

restraint; self-restraint; general law of morality, paramount duty (opp.

niyama, minor duty); observance, rule.

yama 2. yam-a, a. (ā, ī) forming a pair; m. twin (du. twins; designation of

the Aśvins); N. of the male Twin of Yamī, the first man, son of Vivasvat

(RV.); in the Veda Yama is the god who rules over the departed fathers

in heaven; in C. he is regarded as the god of death, presiding in the lower

regions (his name being supposed to mean subduer or punisher), younger

brother of Manu (the first man), regent of the south, and reputed author

of hymns and of a law-book; planet Saturn; n. pair.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

yama au u viratau . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (bhvā°-para°-aka°-aniṭ .

ktvāveṭ .) au, yantā . u, yamitvā yantvā . viratirnivṛttiḥ . yacchati pāpāt

sādhuḥ . iti durgādāsaḥ ..

yama ka mi pariveṣaṇe . tadabhāve . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (curā°-para°-

saka°-seṭ .) ka mi, yamayati yāmayati . pariveṣaṇaṁ annāderarpaṇam .

veṣṭanamityeke . viṣatyavyāptāvityasya rūpamiti ramānāthaḥ . kecittu

pariveṣaṇa evāyaṁ mānubandhaḥ . yamayatyannaṁ dbijāya gṛhī .

anyatra niyāmayati saṁyāmayati ityāhuḥ . anye tu apariveṣaṇa evāyaṁ

mānubandhaḥ . niyamayati vimārgaprasthitānāntu daṇḍam . iti śākuntale

. pariveṣaṇe tu yāmayatyannaṁ dvijāya gṛhī ityāhuḥ . tena ubhayasya

prāmāṇikatvādubhayatra vikalpajñāpanārthañcānubandhaḥ kṛtaḥ . iti

durgādāsaḥ ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

yama uparatau bhvā° para° saka° aniṭ yacchati ayaṁsīt udit ktvā veṭ .

yamitvā yatvā yattaḥ . ā + dīrghīkaraṇe ātma° . upa + vivāhe ātma° .

yama pariveṣaṇe cu° u° saka° seṭ vā ghaṭā° . yamayati yāmavati

ayīyamat ta ayayāmat ta .

yama pu yama—ghañ . ahiṁsā satyavacanaṁ brahmacaryamakalkatā .

asteyamiti pañcaite yamākhyāni vratāni ca ityukte 1 ahiṁsādau tacca

dehamātrasādhyam āvaśyakamavaśyakāryaṁ nityaṁ kāryamiti amaraḥ

indriyādīnāṁ 2 saṁyamane ca . yamayati ac . prāṇināṁ

śubhāśubhakarmānusāreṇa daṇḍavidhāyaka īśvaraniyukte dakṣiṇasthe 3

devabhede pu° amaraḥ . tatsvāmikatvāt 4 kāke ca . bhrātṛtvena

yamasambandhini 5 śanau 6 ekagarbhajāyamāne yamaje tri° medi° . 7

dvitvasaṁkhyāyāṁ 8 yamadevatāke bharaṇonakṣatre jyo° .

dikpālayamabhedāḥ caturdaśa bhaviṣyapu° uktā yathā yamāya

dharmarājāya mṛtyave cāntakāya ca . vaivakhatāya kālāya

sarvabhūtakṣayāya ca . auḍambarāya daghnāya nīlāya parameṣṭhine .

vṛkodarāya citrāya citraguptāya vai namaḥ . thogāṅgayamākṣa pāta° sū°

bhā° uktā yathā

yamaniyamāsanaprāṇāyāmapratyāhāradhāraṇādhyānasamādhayo’ṣṭāvaṅ

gāni mū° . yathākramaṁ eteṣām anuṣṭhānaṁ svarūpañca vakṣyāmaḥ

bhā° . tatra ahiṁsāsatyāsteyabrahmacaryāparigrahāyamāḥ mū° .

tatrāhiṁsā sarvatho sarvadā sarvabhūtānāmanatidrohaḥ . uttare ca

yamaniyamāstanmūlāstatsiddhiparatayā tatpratipadānāya pratipādyante

tadavadātakaraṇāyaivopādīyante . tathācoktaṁ sa khalvayaṁ brāhmaṇo

yathā yathā vratāni bahūni samāditsate tathā tathā pramādakṛtebhyo

hiṁsānidānebhyo nivartamānastāmevāvadātarūpāmahiṁsāṁ karoti .

satyaṁ yathārthe vāṅmanuse yathādṛṣṭaṁ yathānumitaṁ yathāśrutaṁ

tathā vāṅmanaśceti svabodhasaṁkrāntaye vāguktā sā yadi na vañcitā

bhrāntā vā pratipattibandhyā vā bhavet ityeṣā sarvabhūtopa kārārthaṁ

pravṛttā na bhūtopaghātāya yadi caivamapyamidhīya mānā

mūtopaghātaparaiva syānna satyaṁ bhavet pāpameva bhavet tena

puṇyābhāsena puṇyapratirūpakena kaṣṭaṁ tamaḥ prāpnuyāt tasmāt

parīkṣya sarvabhūtahitaṁ satyaṁ brūyāt . steyamaśāstra pūrvakaṁ

dravyāṇāṁ parataḥ svīkaraṇaṁ tatpratiṣedhaḥ

punaraspṛhārūpamasteyamiti . brahmacaryaṁ guptendriyasyopasthasya

saṁyamaḥ . viṣayāṇāmarjanarakṣaṇakṣayasaṅgahiṁsādoṣadarśanā

dasvīkaraṇamaparigraha ityete yamāḥ bhā° . gāruḍe tu tasya

daśavidhatvamuktaṁ yathā brahmacarye dayākṣāntirdhyānaṁ

satyamakalkatā . ahiṁsā’steya mādhuryaṁ damaścaite yamāḥ smṛtāḥ

105 a° .

यमल — yamala Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899yamala mf («ā») n. twin, paired, doubled

yamala m. a singer in a duet

yamala m. N. of the number «two»

yamala du. twins, a pair, couple, brace &c.

yamala n. a pair

yamala see p.846, col.3.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

yamala a. Twin, one of a couple. —laḥ The number ‘two’. —lau (dual) A

pair. —laṁ, —lī A pair, couple. —lī A dress consisting of two pieces.

— Comp.

—patraḥ N. of two trees (kovidāra and aśmaṁtaka).

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

yamala (von 2. yama) 1) adj. «verzwillingt, gepaart, doppelt» (n. «Paar»

TRIK. 2, 5, 38. H. 1425. MED. 1. 125. HALĀY. 4, 15) SUŚR. 1, 66, 1.

chidrāḥ 2, 247, 11. yamalairvegaiḥ 495, 1. yamalā bhadrapadāḥ VARĀH.

BṚH. S. 105, 2. yamalaṁ jātaṁ ca kusumaphalam 46, 33. yamalodbhava

«Geburt von Zwillingen» 46, 53. -śānti «eine Sühnungshandlung nach der

Geburt von Zwillingen» SAṁSK. K. 91,a. yamalau «Zwillinge» MĀRK. P.

106, 4. yamalābhyāmarjunābhyām «ein Paar» Arjuna-«Bäume» (die Kṛṣṇa

im Wege standen und von ihm entwurzelt wurden) HARIV. 3451

(yamābhyām die neuere Ausg.). yamalārjunau personificirt als Feinde

Kṛṣṇa’s und später als Verwandlungen Nalakubara’s und Maṇigrīva’s,

zweier Söhne des Kubera, angesehen, H. 219. R. 7, 6, 35. 7, 23, 1, 42.

BHĀG. P. 10, 10, 23. fgg. yamalārjunakau HARIV. 5876.

yamalārjunabhañjana Bein. Viṣṇu’s oder Kṛṣṇa’s H. 221. Sch. PAÑCAR. 4,

1, 23. 3, 132. yamala m. als Bez. «der Zahl zwei» SŪRYAS. 8, 5. 7. — 2) f.

ā a) «eine best. Form des Schluchzens» (hikkā) SUŚR. 2, 494, 15. 495, 2.

— b) N. pr. einer Tantra-Gottheit Verz. d. Oxf. H. 109, «a», 27. Vgl.

yāmala. — c) N. pr. eines Flusses ŚATR. 1, 54. — 3) f. ī «ein Paar Stöcke»

MED.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

yamala yama + la,

I. n. A pair.

II. f. lī, A sort of dress, a body and petticoat.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

yamala a. twin, paired, doubled; m. a twin.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

yamala yama-la, a. forming a pair, double; m. twin; the number two;

-loka, m. world of Yama;

-vat, a. self-restrained, controlling one’s passions;

-viṣaya, m. Yama’s realm;

-vrata, n. Yama’s method;

-śikha, m. N. of a Vetāla;

-sandana, n. Yama’s abode;

-sabhā, f. Yama’s tribunal;

-sāda-na, n. Yama’s abode;

-sū, a. bearing twins;

-sūkta, n. the Yama hymn;

-svasṛ, f. Yama’s sister, ep. of the Yamunā.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

yamala na° yamaṁ yogaṁ lāti lā—ka . 1 yugme amaraḥ vṛndāvanasthe 2

vṛkṣabhede ca . tañca kṛṣṇaḥpadā babhañca harivaṁ° .

युज् — yuj Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899yuj (cf. 2. «yu» cl.7.P. ā. «yunakti, yuṅkte» (ep. also «yuṇjati, -te»; Ved.

«yojati, -te; yuje, yujmahe», 3. pl. «yujata» Impv. «yukṣva»; Pot. «yuṇjīyāt»

; pf. «yuyoja, yuyuje» &c. &c., 3. sg. «yuyojate» ; aor. Class. P. «ayokṣīt,

ayaukṣīt» or «ayujat»; Ved. also ā. «ayuji»; Ved. and Class. «ayukṣi,

ayukta»; fut. «yoktā» ; «yokṣyati» ; «-te» &c. &c.; inf. «yoktum» ; «yuje» ;

ind. p. «yuktvā» &c. &c.; «yuktvāya» ; «-yujya» &c.), to yoke or join or

fasten or harness (horses or a chariot) &c. &c.; to make ready, prepare,

arrange, fit out, set to work, use, employ, apply ; to equip (an army) ; to

offer, perform (prayers, a sacrifice) ; to put on (arrows on a bow-string) ;

to fix in, insert, inject (semen) ; to appoint to, charge or intrust with (loc.

or dat.) ; to command, enjoin ; to turn or direct or fix or concentrate (the

mind, thoughts &c.) upon (loc.) &c. &c.; (P. ā.) to concentrate the mind

in order to obtain union with the Universal Spirit, be absorbed in

meditation (also with «yogam») &c.; to recollect, recall ; to join, unite,

connect, add, bring together &c. &c. (ā. to be attached, cleave to ; to

confer, or bestow anything (acc.) upon (gen. or loc.) (ā. with acc., to

become possessed of ; with «ātmani», to use for one’s self, enjoy ; to

bring into possession of, furnish or endow with (instr.) &c.; to join one’s

self to (acc.) ; (in astron.) to come into union or conjunction with (acc.)

Pass. «yujyate» (ep. also «-ti»; aor. «ayoji»), to be yoked or harnessed or

joined &c. &c. &c.; to attach one’s self to (loc.) ; to be made ready or

prepared for (dat.) ; to be united in marriage ; to be endowed with or

possessed of (instr. with or without «saha») &c.; (in astron.) to come

into conjunction with (instr.) ; to accrue to, fall to the lot of (gen.) ; to be

fit or proper or suitable or right, suit anything (instr.), be fitted for (loc.),

belong to or suit any one (loc. or gen.), deserve to be (nom.) &c.; (with

«na») not to be fit or proper &c. for (instr.) or to (inf., also with pass.

sense = «ought not to be») Caus. «yojayati» (m.c. also «-te»; aor.

«ayūyujat»; Pass. «yojyate»), to harness, yoke with (instr.), put to (loc.)

&c.; to equip (an army), draw up (troops) &c.; to use, employ, set to

work, apply, undertake, carry on, perform, accomplish &c.; to urge or

impel to ; to lead towards, help to (loc.) ; to set (snares, nets &c.) ; to

put or fix on (esp. arrows) &c.; to aim (arrows) at (loc.) ; to fasten on or

in, attack, adjust, add, insert ; (with «manas, ātmānam» &c.) to direct

the thoughts to, concentrate or fix the mind upon (loc.) ; to join, unite,

connect, combine, bring or put together (also = write, compose) &c.; to

encompass, embrace ; to put in order, arrange, repair, restore ; to endow

or furnish or provide with (instr.) &c.; to mix (food) with (instr.) ; to

confer anything upon (loc.) ; (in astron.) to ascertain or know («jānāti»)

the conjunction of the moon with an asterism (instr.) 11 ; (ā.) to think

little of, esteem lightly, despise in Desid. «yuyukṣati», to wish to harness

or yoke or join &c.; to wish to appoint or institute ; to wish to fix or aim

(arrows) ; (ā.) to wish to be absorbed in meditation, devout Intens.

«yoyujyate, yoyujīti» or «yoyokti» Gr. ([Cf. Gk. [greek]; Lat. ‘jungere’,

‘jugum’; Lith. ‘jungus’; Slav. ‘igo’; Goth. ‘juk’; Germ. ‘joh’, ‘Joch’; Angl.

Sax. ‘geoc’; Eng. ‘yoke’.])

yuj mfn. (mostly ifc.; when uncompounded, the strong cases have a

nasal e.g. nom. «yuṅ, yuṇjau, yuṇjas», but «aśva-yuk» &c. joined, yoked,

harnessed, drawn by &c. &c. (cf. «aśva-, hari-, hayottama-yuj»)

mfn. furnished or provided or filled with, affected by, possessed of

(instr., mostly comp.) &c.

mfn. bestowing, granting (e.g. «kāma-yuj», «granting wishes»)

mfn. exciting, an exciter (e.g. «yuṇ bhiyaḥ», an exciter of fear)

mfn. being in couples or pairs, even (not odd or separate) &c.

yuj m. a yoke-fellow, companion, comrade, associate

yuj m. a sage who devotes his time to abstract contemplation

yuj m. a pair, couple, the number «two»

yuj du. the two Aśvins

yuj mfn. (in astron.) the zodiacal sign Gemini.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

yuj I. 7 U. (yunakti, yuṁkte, yuyoja, yuyuje, ayujat, ayaukṣīt, ayukta,

yokṣyati-te, yoktuṁ, yukta)

(1) To join, unite, attach, connect. add; tamarthamiva bhāratyā

sutayā yoktumarhasi Ku. 6. 79; see pass. below.

(2) To yoke, harness, put to; bhānuḥ sakṛdyuktaturaṁga eva S. 5. 4;

Bg. 1. 14.

(3) To furnish or endow with; as in guṇayukta.

(4) To use, employ, apply; praśaste karmaṇi tathā sacchabdaḥ pārtha

yujyate Bg. 17. 26; Ms. 7. 204.

(5) To appoint, set (with loc.).

(6) To direct, turn or fix upon (as the mind &c.).

(7) To concentrate one’s attention upon; manaḥ saṁyamya maccitto

yukta āsīta matparaḥ Bg. 6. 14; yuṁjannevaṁ sadātmānaṁ 15.

(8) To put, place or fix on (with loc.).

(9) To prepare, arrange, make ready, fit. (10) To give, bestow,

confer; āśiṣaṁ yuyuje.

(11) To adhere or cleave to.

(12) To enjoin, charge.

(13) To put in, insert.

(14) To think or medita to upon. —Pass. (yujyate)

(1) To be joined or united with; ravipītajalā tapātyaye punaroghena hi

yujyate nadī Ku. 4. 44; R. 8. 17.

(2) To get, be possessed of; iṣṭairyujyethāṁ Mv. 7; iṣṭena yujyasva S.

5; R. 3. 65.

(3) To be fit or right, be proper, to suit (with loc. or gen.); yā yasya

yujyate bhūmikā tāṁ khalu bhāvena tathaiva sarve vargyāḥ pāṭhitāḥ Māl

1; trailokyasyāpi prabhutvaṁ tvayi yujyate H. 1.

(4) To be ready for; tatā yuddhāya yujyasva Bg. 2. 38, 50.

(5) To be intent on, be absorbed in, be directed towards; Ms. 3. 75,

14. 35; Ki. 7. 13.

(6) To be fastened or harnessed.

(7) To adhere, to be in close contact.

(8) To attain to, possess, obtain.

(9) To be made ready. —Caus. (yojayati-te)

(1) To join, unite, bring together; paraspareṇa spṛhaṇīyaśobhaṁ na

cedidaṁ dvaṁdvamayojayiṣyat R. 7. 14.

(2) To present, give, bestow; R. 10. 56.

(3) To appoint, employ, use; śatrubhiryojayicchatruṁ Pt. 4. 17.

(4) To turn or direct towards; pāpānnivārayati yojayate hitāya Bh. 2.

72.

(5) To excite, urge, instigate.

(6) To perform, achieve.

(7) To prepare, arrange, equip.

(8) To yoke, harness.

(9) To apply, fix, set, place. (10) To furnish or endow with.

(11) To surround.

(12) To despise, think lightly of.

(13) To appoint to. —Desid. (yuyukṣati-te) To wish to join, yoke, give

&c. —II. 1. P., 10 U (yījati, yojayati-te) To unite, join, yoke &c.; see yuj

above. —III. 4 A. (yujyate) To concentrate the mind (identical with the

pass. of yuj I). —IV. 10 A. (yojayate) To censure.

yuj a. (At the end of comp.)

(1) Joined or united with, yoked, drawn by &c.

(2) Furnished or filled with, possessed of.

(3) Exciting, setting on.

(4) Even, not odd. —m.

(1) A joiner, one who unites or joins.

(2) A sage, one who devotes himself to abstract meditation.

(3) A pair, couple (n. also in this sense). —m dual.

(1) The sign Gemimi of the zodiac.

(2) The two Aśvins.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

yuj 1 yunakti, yuṅkte DHĀTUP. 29, 7 (yoge). anuyuñjase HARIV. 3057.

yuñjate 3. sg. ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 2, 6. MBH. 13, 750. ayuñjam 5, 7291.

yuñjata = ayuṅkta 1, 7982. ved. yuje, yunajate, yoja, yojam, yojate und

yuyojate (ṚV. 8, 59, 7) 3. sg.; yuyoja, yuyuje, yuyujre, ayujat, ayuji,

ayujran, yujanta, ayukṣata 3. pl.; yokṣye; yujyate, ayoji; yuktvā, yuktvāya

VS. 11, 3; yoktum, yuje infin. ṚV. 8, 41, 6. 1) «schirren, anspannen»; Ross

und Wagen: yujyate rathaḥ ṚV. 4, 15, 1. yuktvā haribhyāmupa

yāsadarvāṅ 5, 40, 4. 56, 6. kamacchā yuñjāthe ratham 74, 3. yāmeṣu

yaddha yuñjate śubhe 1, 87, 3. (uṣāḥ) gobhiraruṇebhiryujānā «fahrend

mit» 5, 80, 3. 2, 18, 3. 3, 26, 4. 7, 16, 2. 23, 3. āsthādrathaṁ svadhayā

yujyamānam 78, 4. AV. 19, 13, 1. VS. 4, 33. 35, 2. harī indro yuyojate ṚV.

8, 59, 7. yoktreṇa yogyaṁ yuñjanti ŚAT. BR. 1, 9, 2, 33. athosrau yuñjanti

ŚĀÑKH. GṚHY. 1, 15, 8. yuktvā hayān MBH. 1, 192. 7948 (wo mit der ed.

Bomb. ayuñjan zu lesen ist). Spr. 2631. yujyantāṁ syandaneṣu turaṁgāḥ

PRAB. 78, 14. yokṣyanti dhuri dhenukāḥ MBH. 3, 13035. (satsamāgamaḥ)

duḥkhānāṁ dhuri yujyate so v. a. «wird an die Spitze gestellt» Spr. 3265.

yuktvā rathavaram HARIV. 4461. vājibhiḥ R. GORR. 2, 38, 10. fg.

yujyatāṁ yugyam 1, 71, 3. R. SCHL. 2, 70, 12. 3, 39, 4. MBH. 3, 11761.

yukta «angeschirrt, angespannt» ṚV. 1, 116, 18. rathe yuktāsa āśavaḥ

118, 4. 5, 27, 2. etaśo dhūrṣu yuktaḥ 7, 63, 2. 4, 48, 4. Wagen 69, 2. AV.

13, 3, 9. MBH. 3, 2791. R. 2, 46, 27. R. GORR. 2, 38, 12.

śvetairhayairyukte mahati syandane BHAG. 1, 14. MBH. 3, 11921. HARIV.

2459. R. 2, 39, 13. R. GORR. 1, 17, 3. vājirathānyuktān R. SCHL. 2, 92,

31. rathena kharayuktena 2, 69, 15. 18. vājinaḥ MBH. 3, 15672. bhānuḥ

sakṛdyuktaturaṁgaḥ ŚĀK. 101. indriyāṇi Spr. 5099. triyukta «mit Dreien

bespannt» KĀTY. ŚR. 15, 1, 22. 22, 4, 15. caturyukta MBH. 5, 3045. — 2)

«anspannen» in verschiedenen Uebertragungen so v. a. «in Thätigkeit

setzen, in Gebrauch nehmen, zurüsten, verrichten» u. dgl.: āddakṣiṇā

yujyate vājayantī ṚV. 5, 1, 3. die Soma — Steine (vgl. 10, 94, 6. 7) 40, 8.

43, 4. 3, 41, 2. 57, 4. 7, 42, 1. LĀṬY. 1, 10, 1. den Mörser ṚV. 1, 28, 5.

pātrāṇi ŚAT. BR. 4, 4, 1, 17. dhiyā yuyujra indavaḥ ṚV. 1, 46, 8. vayamu

tvā rathaṁ na vājasātaye. dhiye pūṣannayukṣmahi 6, 51, 3. VS. 11, 3.

AIT. BR. 6, 23. yuñjate mana uta yuñjate dhiyaḥ ṚV. 5, 81, 1. 7, 27, 1.

VS. 11, 1. fgg. (1, 3 = ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 2, 3 mit Varianten). indriyāṇi mano

yuṅkte sadaśvāniva sārathiḥ. indriyāṇi mano buddhiḥ kṣetrajñe yujyate

sadā.. MBH. 14, 1426. mano duṣṭam — buddhyā yuñjīta BHĀG. P. 3, 28, 7.

brahma ṚV. 10, 13, 1. nedeva mā yunajannatra devāḥ 51, 4. 27, 4. ugraṁ

yuyujma pṛtanāsu sāsahim 8, 50, 12. yujyante yasyāmṛtvijaḥ AV. 12, 1,

38. TS. 3, 1, 10, 2. yajñam ŚAT. BR. 1, 9, 2, 32. tena (yajuṣā)

yajñamathāyujat. yuñjānaḥ sa yajurveda iti ścāstraviniścayaḥ Verz. d.

Oxf. H. 54, «b», 15. vācam LĀṬY. 1, 8, 9. mā no ‘to ‘nyatpitaro

yuṁgdhvam (sc. vāsaḥ) ĀŚV. ŚR. 2, 7, 6. cakṣuḥ śrotraṁ ka u devo

yunakti, prāṇaḥ yuktaḥ KENOP. 1. yujyatāṁ mahatī senā «werde

gerüstet» R. 2, 79, 9 (86, 13 GORR.). 92, 30 (101, 33 GORR.). MĀRK. P.

125, 4. tāsāmasurasenānāṁ yujyatīnām HARIV. 8065. akālayuktasainya

Spr. 6; vgl. yuktasena. āśiṣo yuyujuḥ — ādirājāya so v. a. «sprachen

Segenswünsche» BHĀG. P. 4, 19, 41. 9, 11, 29. yuñjānaḥ paramāśiṣaḥ 5,

13. namo ‘yuṁkṣmahi sākṣiṇe «brachten unsere Verehrung dar» 4, 30, 26.

praśaste karmaṇi tathā sacchabdaḥ pārtha yujyate «wird gebraucht, —

angewandt» BHAG. 17, 26. ādānamapriyakaraṁ dānaṁ ca priyakārakam.

abhīpsitānāmarthānāṁ kāle yuktaṁ praśasyate.. «angewandt» M. 7, 204.

taṁ māmevaṁvidham — samarthamarinigrahe. kasmādyunakṣi (so die ed.

Bomb.) sārathye «anstellen bei» MBH. 8, 1365. (tān) yuyoja sa

yathāyogamadhikāreṣu 2, 1289. kārye mahati yuñjānaḥ 12, 3498.

yogyeṣvamātyānkāryeṣu yuñjīta KATHĀS. 34, 194. taṁ

prajāsargarakṣāyām — yuyoja yuyuje ‘nyāṁśca sa vai sarvaprajāpatīn

BHĀG. P. 4, 30, 51. bhrātṝndigvijaye ‘yuṅkta 10, 72, 12. vānaro ‘yaṁ

naraśreṣṭha yujyatāṁ setukarmaṇi R. 5, 94, 15. Spr. 3307. mahati

karmaṇi yujyamānaḥ «beschäftigt mit» BHĀG. P. 6, 3, 25. pass. «sich

rüsten zu» (dat.): yuddhāya yujyasva BHAG. 2, 38. yogāya 50. krūrāya

karmaṇe yuktaḥ «gerüstet zu» MBH. 7, 881. yātrāyukta SUŚR. 1, 122, 5.

yukta «an’s Werk gesetzt, angestellt, beschäftigt, obliegend, sich

befleissigend, bedacht auf» (die Ergänzung im loc. oder im comp.

vorangehend) ṚV. 10, 27, 9. yathā yukto jātavedo na riṣyāḥ 51, 7. KĀTY.

ŚR. 3, 4, 22. P. 6, 2, 66. (carāḥ) ye yuktā drupade mayā MBH. 5, 7549.

ayuktacāra R. 3, 37, 7. 10. aśvānāṁ vāhane yuktaḥ MBH. 3, 2635. hayeṣu

4, 315. agniṣu R. GORR. 2, 109, 8. kriyāsu Spr. 763. ācāre M. 1, 108.

svādhyāye, daive karmaṇi 3, 75. 127. lokasyāpyāyane 213. 4, 35. 6, 8. 7,

125. 9, 324. 326. MBH. 3, 1786. paurāṇāmahite R. 1, 39, 22. 77, 10. R.

GORR. 2, 100, 3. 3, 69, 8. 6, 106, 3. R. ed. Bomb. 6, 87, 22. Spr. 4491.

BHĀG. P. 1, 19, 17. 8, 10, 1. vyasaneṣvayuktaḥ Spr. 460, v. l.

maṅgalācāra- M. 4, 145. fg. 9, 259. tapo- MBH. 1, 7626. 5, 6016.

parahitavyāpārayuktātman Spr. 2004. dhyānayuktena manasā Verz. d.

Oxf. H. 53,a,12. «geübt, geschickt, erfahren» R. 5, 33, 7.

dharmārthayorjñāne MBH. 5, 1104. ārohe vinaye caiva yukto

vāraṇavājinām R. 2, 1, 20. koṣasaṁgrahaṇe, balaparigrahe R. GORR. 1,

7, 7. 10. ayuktabuddhirguṇadoṣadarśane 3, 37, 23. a- (= avivekin Comm.)

BHĀG. P. 10, 73, 11. — 3) «auflegen» Geschosse (auf den Bogen): yuyoja

bāṇān MBH. 1, 7025. ayuñjameva caivāhaṁ tadastraṁ bhṛgunandane 5,

7291. mā yuṅkṣva divyānyastrāṇi 3, 12309. 5, 7265. «befestigen»: divyaṁ

cedaṁ kirīṭaṁ me svayamindro yuyoja ha 3, 12278. ābharaṇāni Spr. 3307.

vekāraṁ netrayoryuñjyānnakāraṁ sarvasaṁdhiṣu «fügen auf» BHĀG. P. 6,

8, 8. śirasi kapālāni «setzen auf» LĀṬY. 8, 8, 18. yonau reto yunakti

«fügen in, thun in» ŚAT. BR. 7, 5, 1, 33. tvāṁ hṛdi yuñjan «in’s Herz

schliessend» BHĀG. P. 3, 24, 34. med. und pass. «sich hängen an» (eig.

und übertr.): yuñjānāśca vilambire (so die neuere Ausg.)

kaṇṭheṣu HARIV. 11767. yujyettatra na paṇḍitaḥ Spr. 100. — 4) eine

Zuneigung u.s.w. «Jmd» (loc.) «zuwenden»: mayi yo yastava sneho

rohasene sa yujyatām MṚCCH. 155, 17. yujyamānayā bhaktyā bhagavati

BHĀG. P. 3, 25, 19. ātmānam, manaḥ, mānasam, cetaḥ, cittam, cintām

«den Geist, den Sinn, die Gedanken auf einen Punkt richten»; act. und

med. MAITRJUP. 6, 3. BHAG. 6, 15. 10. 28. 9, 34. BHĀG. P. 2, 1, 19. 2, 7.

4, 1, 26. die Ergänzung im loc. 3, 9, 23. 24, 43. 27, 26. 4, 28, 38. 6, 2, 40.

7, 5, 41. 9, 6, 51. 54. Ohne ātmānam u.s.w. «sich vertiefen»; med. MBH.

13, 750. MĀRK. P. 43, 40. yuñjāna MBH. 14, 562 (in beiden Ausgg.

fälschlich bhuñjāna). BHĀṢĀP. 64. act. MBH. 14, 546. BHĀG. P. 7, 1, 25.

MĀRK. P. 111, 2. yoktuṁ samupacakrame MBH. 12, 12580. mit

beigefügtem yogam dass.; act. BHAG. 6, 12. MĀRK. P. 39, 27. med. 28.

yujyate (samādhau) DHĀTUP. 26, 68. SIDDH. K. zu P. 7, 1, 71. yujyate

brahmacārī yogam P. 3, 1, 87, Vārtt. 5, Sch. yukta «gesammelt,

aufmerksam, vertieft, ganz bei der Sache seiend»: yo me girastuvijātasya

pūrvīryuktenābhi tryaruṇo gṛṇāti (sc. manasā SĀY.) ṚV. 5, 27, 3. yathā vā

yuktamātmānaṁ manyeta tathā yukto ‘dhīyīta svādhyāyam ĀŚV. GṚHY. 3,

2, 2. ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 2, 2. TAITT. UP. 1, 11, 4. MUṆḌ. UP. 3, 2, 5. ṚV.

PRĀT. 14, 28. M. 2, 223. 243. 4, 95. 100. 6, 31. 7, 142. 206. 9, 312. 11,

259. BHAG. 2, 61. 6, 8. 14. 8, 14. MBH. 1, 2339. 12, 4142. 14, 563.

HARIV. 5236. fg. R. GORR. 2, 8, 39. 3, 72, 7. 7, 106, 16. Spr. 3488. 4093.

4578. 4620. 5010. 5261. BHĀṢĀP. 64. su- MAITRJUP. 4, 4. a- BHAG. 18,

28. yasminyuktā brahmarṣayo devatāśca «in den versenkt» ŚVETĀŚV. UP.

4, 15. śatrusevini mitre ca yuktataro bhavet «gar sehr auf seiner Hut

seiend» M. 7, 186. yuktatama BHAG. 6, 47. — 5) «verbinden,

zusammenbringen, aneinanderfügen; anreihen» ṚV. 1, 165, 5. agniṁ

yunajmi śavasā ghṛtena VS. 18, 51. stomam LĀṬY. 1, 12, 2. 2, 5, 20. ŚAT.

BR. 14, 8, 14, 2 (KAUṢ. UP. 2, 6). MAITRJUP. 6, 21 (med.). nūnaṁ

bhūtāni bhagavānyunakti viyunakti ca BHĀG. P. 10, 82, 42. sa hi

pratyayārthamātmanā yunakti KĀŚ. zu P. 1, 2, 51. aśvapādena —

dvijanmāyoji «wurde zusammengeführt mit» RĀJA-TAR. 3, 366. pass.

«sich verbinden mit»: sa tayā kuntibhojasya du hitrā kurunandanaḥ..

yuyuje «verband sich ehelich» MBH. 1, 4420. fg. mantribhiryuyuje

nītiviśāradaiḥ «er umgab sich mit» RAGH. 8, 17. «Jmd» (acc.) «mit Etwas»

(instr.) «verbinden» so v. a. «versehen, beschenken mit, Jmd einer Sache

theilhaftig machen»: sāntvamānārthasaṁbhogairyunakti MBH. 2, 474. R.

1, 9, 68 (67 GORR.). tatremaṁ tarjanairghoraiḥ yunaḥ sāntvaiśca

yokṣyatha 3, 62, 33. yamaṁ yunajmi kālena BHAṬṬ. 6, 37.

āśīrbhiryuñjatātulām (so die ed. Bomb.) MBH. 1, 7982. ātmānaṁ śreyasā

yokṣye 3, 2489. 7, 696. ye ‘nāgasau vayamayuṁkṣmahi kilviṣeṇa BHĀG.

P. 3, 16, 25. na māṁ samayabhedena yoktumarhasi HARIV. 10963. R.

GORR. 2, 30, 34. 35, 34. māṁ duḥkhairyoktumicchasi Spr. 4524.

KUMĀRAS. 6, 79. pass. «einer Sache» (instr.) «theilhaftig werden»:

vedapuṇyena yujyate M. 2, 78. phalena 7, 128. 144. MBH. 3, 2629. 10862.

kāladharmaṇā R. GORR. 1, 43, 27. Spr. 1601. 3477, v. l. 3798. 4025.

4433. 4840. 4914. 5098. ŚĀK. 64, 16. RAGH. 3, 65. KUMĀRAS. 4, 44.

KATHĀS. 22, 92. 30, 34. BHĀG. P. 1, 11, 39. 3, 7, 5. mit dopp. instr.

«durch Jmd einer Sache theilhaftig werden» MBH. 3, 258. BHĀG. P. 1, 11,

24. statt des einfachen instr. der Sache auch der instr. mit saha MBH. 13,

7101. yukta «verbunden, vereinigt, hinzugefügt, an einander gereiht,

regelmässig auf einander folgend» VARĀH. BṚH. S. 77, 36. BHĀG. P. 3,

26, 51. 4, 1, 48. viśo na yuktā uṣaso yatante ṚV. 7, 79, 2. 1, 23, 15.

ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 13, 19, 17. yuktam adv. «in Schaaren» ŚAT. BR. 12, 4, 1, 3.

yukta «verbunden —, versehen mit, im Besitz von» (instr. oder im comp.

vorangehend) ṚV. PRĀT. 1, 19. mahatainasā M. 2, 221. 6, 70. 9, 169. 11,

53. MBH. 1, 7982. 3, 1807. 2076. 2802. 12, 3496. sisṛkṣayā so v. a.

«schaffen beabsichtigend» HARIV. 534. BHAG. 8, 10. R. 1, 1, 3. 9. 20. 4,

7. 7, 18. 52, 11. 53, 7. 55, 19. RAGH. 7, 1. Spr. 790. SŪRYAS. 1, 48. fg.

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 8, 21. 15, 19. 65, 11. 77, 6. 22. KATHĀS. 14, 61. 18, 229.

23, 1. BHĀG. P. 1, 2, 15. 9, 16. AK. 3, 1, 27. VOP. 3, 143. chinneva yuktā

kadalī gajena «in Berührung gekommen mit» R. 3, 53, 61. phala-

«verbunden mit» KĀṬY. ŚR. 1, 1, 2. AV. PRĀT. 3, 89. 4, 3. P. 2, 3, 4. 8. 19.

M. 9, 310. 12, 4. BHAG. 2, 50. MBH. 1, 7345. 3, 2677. R. 2, 26, 25.

dharmayukta (vākya) 39, 17. 54, 19. 55, 9. MEGH. 25. Spr. 2734. 3198.

3287, v. l. SĀṁKHYAK. 2. SŪRYAS. 2, 63. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 16, 27. 17, 10.

43, 46. 50, 8. 53, 97. 55, 20. 56, 21. 80, 15. 103, 11. KATHĀS. 5, 129. 35,

124. AK. 1, 1, 3, 5. 2, 8, 2, 86. H. 527. LA. (III) 4, 6. 35, 17. 55, 13.

viṁśatiścaturyuktā «vierundzwanzig» VARĀH. BṚH. S. 21, 30. 23, 7. 48,

47. kṣemayuktam adv. (s. auch bes.) R. 1, 13, 10 nach dem Comm.

hierher zu ziehen (kṣemo vidhyaparādharāhityaṁ yadvā kṣemo

vighnarāhityam). tathā yuktam «auf diese Weise verbunden» ṚV. PRĀT. 2,

15. tathā yuktaḥ «in solchem Zustande befindlich» MBH. 3, 2958. «so

verfahrend» Spr. 4715. «verbunden mit» so v. a. «bezüglich auf»: gāthā

yajñadānayuktāḥ KĀTY. ŚR. 20, 2, 7. 8. śānti- KAUŚ. 9. jātakarmāṇi

puṁvadvidhānayuktāni MBH. 5, 7407. tavādarśanayuktena śokena R. 5,

32, 37. KĀM. NĪTIS. 14, 12. yuj pass. «in Conjunction treten mit» (instr.):

yadahaḥ puṁsā nakṣatreṇa candramā yujyeta PĀR. GṚHY. 1, 14.

jyeṣṭhādyāni navarkṣāṇyuḍupatinātītya yujyante VARĀH. BṚH. S. 4, 7.

uttarā phalgunī hyadya śvastu hastena yokṣyate R. 5, 73, 15. yadā puṁsā

nakṣatreṇa candramā yuktaḥ syāt ĀŚV. GṚHY. 1, 14, 2. WEBER, JYOT.

70. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 98, 12. 104, 56. puṣyayukte niśākare 48, 45. 69, 3.

98, 16. adya bārhaspataḥ śrīmānyuktaḥ puṣyeṇa (so die ed. Bomb.: kiṁ

nu bārhaspato yogo yuktaḥ puṣyeṇa GORR.) R. 2, 26, 9 (11 GORR.).

nakṣatreṇa yuktaḥ kālaḥ P. 4, 2, 3. yuktaḥ kālena yaśca na so v. a. «wer

nicht die rechte Zeit benutzt» Spr. 4631. kālayuktaṁ vākyam

«zeitgemäss» R. 1, 32, 1. deśakā lārthayukta BHĀG. P. 1, 15, 27. kāryeṇa

mahatā yuktaḥ so v. a. «beschäftigt mit, begriffen in» MBH. 5, 5427. (na)

svabhāvamativartante yoniyuktāḥ śarīriṇaḥ «gebunden an, abhängig von»

Spr. 4309. — 6) «mit sich verbinden»; mit acc.: (marutaḥ) ubhe yujanta

(= yojayanti SĀY.) rodasī ṚV. 6, 66, 6. 8, 20, 4. (śaśī) rohiṇīṁ yadi

yunakti «in Conjunction treten mit» VARĀH. BṚH. S. 24, 28. 47, 18.

māghaśuklāhniko yuṅkte śraviṣṭhāyāṁ ca vārṣikīm (?) WEBER, JYOT.

113. so v. a. «theilhaftig werden»: na nu tamo na guṇāṁśca yuṅkṣe

BHĀG. P. 7, 9, 32. — 7) «Jmd» (loc. gen.) «Etwas» (acc.) «zu Theil werden

lassen, zukommen lassen, verleihen»: anāgasyaghaṁ yuñjan BHĀG. P. 1,

17, 14. yeṣu — śikṣādaṇḍaṁ na yuñjate 4, 26, 21. śubhāśubhe nṛṇāṁ

yuṅkte MĀRK. P. 51, 11. yadyujyate dehātmajādiṣu nṛbhiḥ BHĀG. P. 8, 9,

29. śeṣamātmani yuñjīta «sich zu Theil werden lassen, selbst geniessen»

M. 6, 12. — 8) «sich vergegenwärtigen, — in’s Gedächtniss zurückrufen»:

taṁ muhūrtaṁ kṣaṇaṁ velāṁ divasaṁ yuyoja (= anucintitavatī NĪLAK.)

MBH. 3, 16753. — 9) «auftragen, befehlen, injungere»: āsthāya

tattadyadayuṅkta nāthaḥ BHĀG. P. 5, 1, 15. — 10) pass. «passen, sich

schicken, gemäss sein, sich ziemen, zukommen, recht sein»: yujyate «so

ist es recht» ŚĀK. 88, 10. KATHĀS. 11, 29. yujyati HARIV. 7064. na

śāpastatra yujyate R. 1, 21, 7. Spr. 3307. KATHĀS. 24, 203. RĀJA-TAR.

4, 101. HIT. 83, 19. BHĀG. P. 4, 19, 27. SARVADARŚANAS. 81, 20. 115,

1. 121, 2. 161, 6 (so v. a. «logisch richtig sein» in SARVADARŚANAS.) sa

svāmī yujyate bhuvi «der eignet sich zum Herrn der Erde» Spr. 2264.

hutāśanapratinidhirdāhātmā nanu yujyate «ist es nicht ganz in der

Ordnung, dass das, was das Feuer vertritt, brennt?» 3579. yadyena

yujyate loke «was zu einander passt» 2392. nahyasminyujyate karma

kiṁcidā mauñjibandhanāt «schickt sich für ihn, kommt ihm zu» M. 2, 171.

MBH. 3, 16700 (yujyati). śabdo mahārāja iti — tasminyuyuje ‘rbhake ‘pi

RAGH. 18, 41. HIT. 16, 12. mahatāmāspade nīcaḥ kadāpi nahi yujyate

Spr. 2136. tadetanme na yujyate KATHĀS. 30, 9. LA. (III) 37, 8. kathaṁ

bhagavataḥ — yujyerannirguṇasya guṇāḥ kriyāḥ BHĀG. P. 3, 7, 2. snuṣā

me yujyate katham «wie käme mir zu?» so v. a. «ich kann nicht haben» 9,

23, 36. PAÑCAT. 40, 24. evaṁ nīcajane ‘pi yujyati gṛhaṁ prāpte satāṁ

sarvadā Spr. 580. atha vā yujyate dvābhyāmapyetat PAÑCAT. 113, 10.

tannātra yujyate sthātum MṚCCH. 35, 21. PAÑCAT. 57, 3. vyasane

mahati prāpte sthiraiḥ sthātuṁ na yujyate MAHĀN. 255. pratikartuṁ

prakṛṣṭasya nāvakṛṣṭena yujyate R. 4, 17, 47. taṁ ca dātuṁ na yujyete

KATHĀS. 57, 157. tathāpi yujyate naiva dātum «er kann nicht gegeben

werden» 159. 12, 166. 45, 196. naitadyujyate sahasaiva pitṛparyāyāgataṁ

vanaṁ tyaktum PAÑCAT. 21, 4. 61, 4. 96, 4. naitadyujyate te kartum 214,

5. tanna tvayaikākinyāsya bhūpate raktabhojanaṁ kartuṁ yujyate 61, 22.

yukta «passend, angemessen, sich schickend, sich ziemend, recht,

richtig» AK. 2, 8, 1, 24. 3, 4, 14, 80. 83. 23, 144. TRIK. 3, 1, 7 (=

parimita). H. 743. HALĀY. 4, 61. 5, 94. M. 8, 34. yuktāhāravihārasya

yuktaceṣṭasya karmasu. yuktasvapnāvavodhasya yogo bhavati duḥkhahā..

BHAG. 6, 17. MBH. 1, 5943. 6153. 3, 16720. 5, 1295. HARIV. 4011. R. 2,

80, 15. 3, 24, 1. 67, 24. SUŚR. 1, 124, 1. MĀLAV. 49. 34, 3. VIKR. 12, 6.

87, 6. Spr. 976. 1643, v. l. 1964. 3546. KATHĀS. 25, 164. 51, 207. RĀJA-

TAR. 4, 412. 6, 208. BHĀG. P. 3, 5, 2. 24, 23. 33, 24. 4, 27, 12. MĀRK. P.

85, 76. PAÑCAT. 69, 10. HIT. 18, 3. LA. (III) 34, 3. 36, 11. iti pañcavidhā

bhāṣā yuktā na punaraṣṭadhā Verz. d. Oxf. H. 181,a,24. 30. a- Spr. 3546.

ŚAṁK. zu BṚH. ĀR. UP. S. 252. SARVADARŚANAS. 29, 2. 34, 22. 79, 16.

su- R. 2, 60, 23. 82, 28. 5, 29, 4. yuktam adv. «auf passende Weise» Spr.

3915. dvijakulanilayaṁ nātha yuktaṁ tyajāmi so v. a. «es ist angemessen,

dass ich verlasse» 4540. na yuktaṁ vasata «es ist nicht angemessen,

dass ihr wohnt» HARIV. 6017. yuktamāṁsala «gehörig fleischig» VARĀH.

BṚH. S. 70, 9. yuktaśītoṣṇa «nicht zu kalt und nicht zu heiss» R. 2, 44, 9.

yukte ca daive yudhyeta «günstig» M. 7, 197. yukte muhūrte R. 1, 73, 8

(75, 9 GORR.). 5, 73, 14. muhūrtena suyuktena 72, 20. «passend» u.s.w.

«für»; mit gen.: anurūpo hi yuktaśca tvaṁ mamāhaṁ tavāpi ca MBH. 3,

16702. 14, 2308. R. 3, 52, 40. 5, 24, 6. MĀLAV. 69, 1. VṚDDHA-CĀṆ. 15,

7. RĀJA-TAR. 4, 62. PRAB. 21, 14. mamātrāvasthānamayuktam HIT. 30,

17. mit loc.: yuktametattvayi MBH. 2, 4. 5, 6089. R. 2, 90, 20 (99, 33

GORR.). 101, 11. yuṣmābhirdarśane yuktam so v. a. «für euch

sehenswerth» HARIV. 6009. mantraṁ rājā mantrayāmāsa yathā yuktaṁ

rakṣaṇe vai prajānām MBH. 5, 7461. yuktaṁ (ayuktaṁ) yat «es ist

passend (unpassend) dass» R. 4, 16, 49. 6, 105, 11. KATHĀS. 14, 3. 32,

72. PAÑCAT. 170, 8. yukta und ayukta mit einem infin.: yuktamito ‘nyataḥ

prayātum Spr. 2369. MUDRĀR. 103, 5. KATHĀS. 32, 48. HIT. 41, 1. PRAB.

55, 12. piśunavacanairduḥkhaṁ netuṁ na yuktamimaṁ janam Spr. 585.

MUDRĀR. 14, 4. RATNĀV. 46, 8. KATHĀS. 28, 104. na

yuktamanayostatra gantum ŚĀK. 56, 9. PRAB. 13, 14. varāhamihirasya na

yuktametatkartum VARĀH. BṚH. S. 47, 2. BHAṬṬ. 5, 86. ayuktaṁ nidhane

kāmaṁ putrasya yatituṁ mayā R. 6, 69, 17. na yuktaṁ

bhavatānnamaśuci dattvā pratiśāpaṁ dātum MBH. 1, 781. yuktaṁ

tasyāprameyasya vīryasattvavato mayā. samāśvāsayintuṁ bhāryām 3,

2678. 14, 838. 1610. yuktaṁ hi yaśasā kṣatraṁ svargaṁ

prāptumasaṁśayam 26. tasmātpratikriyā yuktā bhīṣme kārayituṁ tava 5,

6094. tasmātpratikriyā kartuṁ yuktā tasmai tvayānagha 7022. 7057.

daivodyānāni — yuktānyāsevitumṁ tvayā R. 3, 52, 39. KATHĀS. 22, 169.

na yuktaṁ bhavatāhamanṛtenopacaritum MBH. 1, 769; vgl. HOEFER, Vom

Infinitiv S. 87. 121 und Zeitschr. f. d. W. d. Spr. 2, 182. fgg. — 11) yuñjāna

(Spr. 4350) und yukta (R. 6, 109, 3) «dem es wohlgeht, sich in guten

Verhältnissen befindend.» — 12) yukta in der Gramm. «primitiv» (Gegens.

«abgeleitet») P. 1, 2, 51. — yuñjāna s. auch bes. Vgl. devayukta,

prātaryukta.

caus. yojayati, -te (aus metrischen Rücksichten), ayūyujat 1)

«schirren, anspannen» KAUŚ. 14. 15. yojayadhvaṁ rathān MBH. 1, 7947.

rathānyojayata 7948. 4, 1025. R. 1, 69, 5. 2, 39, 10. 12. 70, 29.

syandanaṁ tairhayottamaiḥ. yojayitvā 46, 26. śyāmaturaṁgayojitaṁ

ratham BHĀG. P. 1, 16, 12. aśvānyojayitvā MBH. 3, 2290. 2788. fg. rathe

2790. 13036. 4, 1017. R. 2, 57, 3 (2 GORR.). 7, 46, 2. VARĀH. BṚH. S.

61, 9. BHĀG. P. 5, 21, 15. ayūyujannuṣṭrakharānrathāṁśca

nāgānhayāṁśca R. 2, 82, 31 (89, 13 GORR.). — 2) ein Heer «rüsten»:

varūthinīm MBH. 4, 985. R. 1, 51, 21. ṣaḍaṅginīm R. GORR. 1, 52, 21.

sainyam 78, 5. Netze, Schlingen «stellen, auswerfen»: jālaṁ te

yojayāmāsuḥ MBH. 13, 2654. pāśo yojitaḥ HIT. 21, 10, v. l. — 3)

«gebrauchen, anwenden, verrichten»: bahudhā hyāśiṣastasya yojitāḥ so v.

a. «dargebracht, gesprochen» MBH. 7, 718. kimāśrayo me stava eṣa

yojyatām BHĀG. P. 4, 15, 22. brahmadaṇḍamayūyujan. rājñi 13, 22.

chandāṁsyayātayāmāni yojitāni dhṛtavrataiḥ «angewandt» 27. saha

gopībhiryojayanmadhurāḥ kathāḥ «Worte wechselnd, sich unterhaltend»

HARIV. 5743. parasya patnyā puruṣaḥ saṁbhāṣāṁ yojayanrahaḥ M. 8,

354. guṇavadbhiḥ sadā naraiḥ. sa kathāṁ yojayāmāsa maitrīṁ

saṁgatameva ca «pflegte» R. GORR. 2, 1, 6. «unternehmen, beginnen»:

mattonmatta- yojito vyavahāraḥ YĀJÑ. 2, 32. «zu Ende bringen»:

ardhaniṣpannaṁ tadvadhūryadayojayat RĀJA-TAR. 5, 403. — 4) «Jmd»

(acc.) «zu Etwas» (dat.) «antreiben»: prabodhotpattaye

śamadamādīnyojayāmaḥ PRAB. 18, 10. pāpānnivārayate yojayate hitāya

Spr. 1771. «Jmd verhelfen zu» (loc.): pare tattve SARVADARŚANAS. 88,

10. «Jmd einsetzen, anstellen bei, beauftragen mit» (loc.): ahaṁ

daṇḍadharo rājā prajānāmiha yojitaḥ BHĀG. P. 4, 21, 21.

bhakṣyabhojyādhikāreṣu duḥśāsanamayojayat MBH. 2, 1290. atra

karmaṇi 5, 7016. KĀM. NĪTIS. 19, 8. BHĀG. P. 5, 5, 15. MĀRK. P.95, 18.

kuṭumbabhārodvahane KATHĀS. 22, 160. yauvarājye RĀJA-TAR. 5, 129.

MĀRK. P. 118, 21. sve sve viṣaye 50, 35. fg. sargayojita BHĀG. P. 3, 13,

17. — 5) «auflegen» ĀŚV. GṚHY. 4, 3, 1. yojayasva dhanuḥśreṣṭhe śaram

R. 1, 75, 29. tato ‘hamānupūrvyeṇa divyānyastrāṇyayojayam MBH. 3,

12232. 12313. 5, 7202. HARIV. 16079. fg. kimarthamastraṁ rakṣassu na

yojayasi «richten auf» R. 5, 36, 48. 68, 18. «anfügen, befestigen»:

ayojayam. vīṇāsu tantrīḥ KATHĀS. 26, 168. triṭitaṁ payodharataṭe hāraṁ

punaryojaya SĀH. D. 42, 21. yadvāci tantyāṁ guṇakarmadāmabhiḥ

sudustarairvatsa vayaṁ yojitāḥ BHĀG. P. 5, 1, 14. nakṣatrāṇi kālāyana

īśvarayojitāni 22, 11. «hinstellen»: padātīṁśca mahīpālaḥ puro ‘nīkasya

yojayet Spr. 4498. «hineinthun, versetzen in»: yojayedbījaṁ yantre

SŪRYAS. 13, 20. karmāṇi kāryamāṇo ‘haṁ nānāyoniṣu yojitaḥ BHĀG. P. 7,

13, 23. vāyuṁ vāyau kṣitau kāyaṁ tejastejasyayūyujat 4, 23, 15. duḥkhe

mahati tatra tvāṁ yojayāmi R. GORR. 2, 38, 7. BHĀG. P. 1, 18, 50. 3, 25,

10. sukule yojayetkanyāṁ putraṁ vidyāsu yojayet. vyasane

yojayecchatrum Spr. 5235. H. 16. BĀLAB. 3. «anfügen»: udarkān KAUŚ. 8.

«hinzufügen» P. 8, 1, 73, Sch. — 6) manaḥ, ātmānam «den Geist richten

auf, sich vertiefen in» (loc.) HARIV. 14555. BHĀG. P. 4, 31, 3. MĀRK. P.

48, 4. ātmānaṁ yojya «sich sammelnd, sich zusammennehmend» MBH. 6,

5816. — 7) «verbinden, vereinigen, zusammenfügen, zusammenbringen»

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 54, 114. 55, 19. RĀJA-TAR. 5, 104. PAÑCAT. 244, 5 (in

der Ausg. von BÜLLER besser yāvajjīvaṁ saṁcārayati). na cedidaṁ

dvaṁdvamayojayiṣyat KUMĀRAS. 7, 66 (= RAGH. 7, 14). anayā yadi

mitraṁ na yojayeyamaham KATHĀS. 22, 83 PRAB. 41, 14. tena

yojitasaṁbandham KUMĀRAS. 6, 50. modakān — phalākārānsuyojitān R.

GORR. 1, 9, 37. śatruṇā yojayecchatrum Spr. 2941. ratnāni śāstrāṇi ca

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 104, 1. teneyaṁ yojitā vṛttiḥ «verfasst» ROTH, Zur L. u.

G. d. W. 60. so v. a. «in Ordnung bringen» Spr. 2512. «Etwas» (acc.) «mit

Etwas» (instr.) «versehen, ausstatten, theilhaftig machen, beschenken»:

(ghanuḥ) yojayāmāsa śareṇa R. GORR. 1, 77, 32. yojayāmāsa navayā

maurvyā gāṇḍīvam MBH. 4, 1910. R. 1, 49, 11. viṣaghnairagadaiścāsya

sarvadravyāṇi yojayet M. 7, 218. dvaṁdvairayojayaccemāḥ

sukhaduḥkhādibhiḥ prajāḥ 1, 26. tapasā yojya deham MBH. 1, 3582. 3,

8425. ripuṁ prāṇaiḥ 6477. abhiṣekeṇa govindam HARIV. 4022. R. 2, 61,

20. R. GORR. 1, 32, 9. 2, 26, 35. 35, 50. 3, 2, 8. 17, 26. 5, 2, 42. 6, 98,

26. 7, 20, 25. Spr. 442. 1607. 5235. RAGH. 10, 57. 12, 40. MĀLAV. 34.

RĀJA-TAR. 1, 281. MĀRK. P. 113, 7. SĀH. D. 289. DAŚAK. in BENF. Chr.

185, 12. PAÑCAT. ed. orn. 2, 5. (tam) yojayāmāsa bāhubhyāṁ paśuṁ

raśanayā yathā so v. a. «umfangen, umschlingen» MBH. 4, 771.

yojayantaṁ ca vākyamātreṇa bhāminīm so v. a. «nur Worte mit ihr

wechselnd» HARIV. 7392. yojita «versehen mit» (instr. oder im comp.

vorangehend) VARĀH. BṚH. S. 2, 20. RĀJA-TAR. 3, 163 (st. des verb.

fin.). BHĀG. P. 10, 79, 17 (desgl.). maṇiriva kṛtrimarāgayojitaḥ Spr. 1920.

MBH. 5, 532 (pīḍita die ed. Bomb.). HARIV. 4652. — 8) «Jmd» (loc.)

«Etwas» (acc.) «zu Theil werden lassen»: kālaṁ jagati yojayan HARIV.

2586. rājasu yojitāṁhasām BHĀG. P. 1, 8, 37. — 9) mit dem instr. eines

Sternbildes «die Conjunction desselben mit dem Monde angeben können»

P. 3, 1, 26, Vārtt. 7. — 10) med. «geringachten» VOP. in DHĀTUP. 33, 36.

desid. yuyukṣati 1) «Jmd» (acc.) «anzustellen —, an ein Geschäft zu

setzen Willens sein»: karma cecchāmi vai kartuṁ tasya yo māṁ yuyukṣati

MBH. 4, 248. 251. — 2) «aufzulegen» (Pfeile auf den Bogen) «Willens

sein»: bāṇāvimau — kasmai yuyukṣasi BHĀG. P. 5, 2, 8. — 3) med. «sich zu

vertiefen gesonnen sein» BHAṬṬ. 3, 41.

adhi «auflegen, aufladen» BHĀG. P. 10, 71, 16.

anu med. P. 1, 3, 64, Vārtt. 1) «wieder einholen, — an sich ziehen» AIT.

BR. 4, 26. ŚAT. BR. 5, 4, 3, 3. — 2) «Jmd» (acc.) «befragen, fragen nach»

(acc.) M. 8, 79. 259. MBH. 4, 26. 105. 12, 1932. 1934 (mit dopp. acc.).

10995. 14, 145. HARIV. 3057. R. GORR. 2, 110, 4. RAGH. 5, 18. 11, 62.

ŚIŚ. 13, 68. DAŚAK. 58, 15. 82, 5. PRAB. 111, 13. P. 8, 2, 94, Sch. — 3)

«eine Lehre ertheilen» ĀŚV. ŚR. 8, 14, 1. anuyoktuṁ jagāda RĀJA-TAR. 6,

61. anuyukta MBH. 13, 1588 nach NĪLAK. = bhṛtakādhyetā «von einem

bezahlten Lehrer unterrichtet werdend.» — 4) «sich bedanken»: te

cānvayujanta (= āśiṣo yuyujuḥ Comm.) BHĀG. P. 10, 7, 16. — 5) «sich

Jmd» (acc.) «anschliessen, in Jmdes Dienste treten» Spr. 4350. — 6)

anuyuktā hi sācivye Spr. 3472 fehlerhaft für ani- hi sā-, dhuri

cānuyujyamānaḥ Spr. 280 fehlerhaft für dhuri ca niyu-. — Vgl. anuyoktar

fgg. — caus. 1) «auflegen» (ein Geschoss) R. 5, 68, 11. — 2) «anfügen,

anreihen» KAUŚ. 44. 53. 106. 136. — desid. «zu fragen nach» (acc.)

«Willens sein»: dharmānanuyuyukṣantaḥ MBH. 12, 1957.

abhyanu «befragen»: -yujya MBH. 12, 5667.

paryanu dass.: -yukta KATHĀS. 27, 162.

samanu 1) «fragen nach»: -yujya Verz. d. Oxf. H. 170,b,39. — 2) «Jmd»

(acc.) «anweisen, Jmd einen Befehl ertheilen»: na ca preṣayitā

kaścitpreṣyaiḥ samanuyujyate R. 5, 1, 68. — Vgl. samanuyojya.

apa med. «sich lösen von» (abl.) ŚAT. BR. 5, 5, 3, 4.

abhi med. P. 1, 3, 64, Vārtt. 1) med. «sich den Wagen anspannen für,

zu» (acc.): yāṁ gatimabhiyuṅkte tāṁ gatiṁ gatvāntato vimuñcate ŚAT.

BR. 1, 8, 3, 27. — 2) act. «wiederholt —, doppelt anspannen» ŚAT. BR. 9,

4, 2, 11. — 3) med. «Jmd» (acc.) «zu Etwas» (dat.) «auffordern»: yaśca

tvābhiyuñjīta yuddhāya R. 7, 61, 9. — 4) «Jmd» (acc.) «angreifen»; med.

MBH. 5, 1975. 1982. 12, 3502. R. 6, 2, 2. KĀM. NĪTIS. 8, 79. act. VARĀH.

JOGAJ. 3, 1. -yujya HARIV. 12151. DAŚAK. in BENF. Chr. 200, 23. —

yoktum KĀM. NĪTIS. 15, 61. KATHĀS. 18, 86. 25, 277. 38, 9. 49, 86. pass.

KĀM. NĪTIS. 8, 39 (wo mit dem Comm. tathānyā yābhi- zu lesen ist). 9,

76. KATHĀS. 15, 97. PRAB. 9, 3. -yukta «angegriffen» AK. 3, 4, 14, 86. H.

an. 4, 95. MED. t. 182. R. 2, 10, 27 (= kṛtaparābhava Comm.). 5, 80, 9. 6,

11, 13. Spr. 191. 207, v. l. 1273, v. l. 1330. 1949. 3548. KATHĀS. 15, 11.

34, 212. PRAB. 8, 10. 84, 1. -yojya (s. auch bes.) «anzugreifen» VARĀH.

BṚH. S. 5, 84. JOGAJ. 3, 1. ādhivyādhijaduḥkhena kadācinnābhiyujyate

«wird nicht heimgesucht» MĀRK. P. 137, 3. — 5) «anklagen», mit dem acc.

der Person und der Sache: yatparairabhiyujyate M. 8, 183. Spr. 5386. —

yukta «angeklagt, verklagt» YĀJÑ. 2, 9. 28. 100. MṚCCH. 143, 8. — 6)

«Etwas fordern, begehren, Ansprüche auf Etwas machen»: abhiyukta =

prārthita TRIK. 3, 3, 170. HARIV. 12190 (anirmukta die neuere Ausg.). —

7) act. «Jmd» (acc.) «an Etwas» (loc.) «stellen, mit Etwas beauftragen»:

sarvāṁstānabhyayuñjaṁste tatrāgnicayakarmaṇi MBH. 14, 2637. — 8)

act. «sich an Etwas» (acc.) «machen, an Etwas gehen»: karma

samāmnāyāmnātamabhiyuñjan (= anutiṣṭhan Comm.) BHĀG. P. 5, 4, 8.

aupakurvāṇakakarmāṇyanabhiyuktāni (= anādṛtāni Comm.) 9, 6. med.

«sich anschicken», mit inf. DAŚAK. in BENF. Chr. 190, 2. «behandeln»

(ärztlich) «mit» (instr.): aupadhaiḥ SUŚR. 1, 94, 16. — 9) med. «seine

Thätigkeit entfalten, wirksam sein»: vāyuryatrābhiyuñjate (=

śabdamabhivyaktaṁ karoti Comm.) ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 2, 6. — 10) -yukta

«ganz bei einer Sache seiend, hingegeben»; = tatpara H. an. 4, 95. MED.

t. 182. BHAG. 9, 22. R. 5, 9, 19. idaṁ viśvaṁ pālyaṁ vidhivadabhiyuktena

manasā UTTARAR. 56, 15 (73, 8). BHĀG. P. 1, 19, 24. koṣṭhāgāre

‘bhiyuktaḥ syāt «bedacht auf» KĀM. NĪTIS. 5, 77. ānṛśaṁsyābhiyukta

MBH. 13, 285. arthapatisevābhiyukta DAŚAK. in BENF. Chr. 190, 5. — 11)

-yukta «bewandert in» (loc.), «eine Sache verstehend, ein Sachkenner»:

kuhakādiṣu prayogeṣu KATHĀS. 32, 126. abhiyuktairaṅgīkṛtaḥ (so ist zu

lesen) MALLIN. zu KUMĀRAS. 3, 44. SĀH. D. 84, 10. VEDĀNTAS. (Allah.)

No. 124. KAIJ. zu P. 3, 3, 122. SĀY. zu ŚAT. BR. 2, 6, 2, 7. 5, 2, 1, 8.

SARVADARŚANAS. 147, 2. fg. 157, 17. 175, 12. — 12) -yuktāḥ Bez. der

den Vaiśya entsprechenden Bewohner von Kuśadvīpa BHĀG. P. 5, 20, 16.

— Vgl. abhiyugvan fgg. — caus. «Jmd» oder «Etwas» (acc.) «mit Etwas»

(instr.) «versehen, einer Sache theilhaftig machen»: diṣṭāntena MBH. 7,

2577. PAÑCAR. 3, 9, 10. PRAB. 109, 15. PAÑCAT. 163, 15.

pratyabhi «einen Gegenangriff auf Jmd» (acc.) «machen»: taṁ

pratyabhiyuktavān KATHĀS. 107, 99. «angreifen»: paraiḥ

pratyabhiyuktānām PRAB. 86, 18, v. l. — Vgl. pratyabhiyoga. — caus. «eine

Gegenklage gegen Jmd» (acc.) «vorbringen» YĀJÑ. 2, 9.

ā 1) «anschirren» ṚV. 3, 50, 2 (act.). vātānhyaśvāndhuryāyuyujre 5,

58, 7. 10, 44, 7. āyuñjan MBH. 1, 7948 fehlerhaft für ayuñjan, wie die ed.

Bomb. hat. — 2) med. «anlegen, befestigen»: alaṁkāramāyuñjāte ŚĀK.

CH. 80, 2. — 3) «Jmd» (loc.) «Etwas» (acc.) «zu Theil werden lassen»:

tadbhavān — mayyāyuṅktāmanugraham BHĀG. P. 3, 14, 10. — Vgl. āyukta

fg. («ganz bei einer Sache seiend» TAITT. UP. 1, 11, 4). — caus. 1) «fügen

—, thun auf» (loc.) PAÑCAR. 3, 2, 17. mālāḥ — āyojitāḥ śirasi ṚT. 2, 21.

«befestigen an» (loc.) BHĀG. P. 5, 23, 3. — 2) «zusammenfügen, bilden»:

kusumāyojitakārmuka KUMĀRAS. 4, 24.

upā act. «anschirren» ṚV. 3, 35, 2.

samupā, -yukta «versehen mit, erfüllt von»: ṛṣibhiḥ samupāyuktaṁ

tīram MBH. 3, 10099.

vyā «sich trennen, auseinandergehen»: -yujya MĀRK. P. 32, 20.

samā 1) «schirren, rüsten, zurechtmachen»: vrajānsvānsvānsamāyujya

yayū rūḍhaparicchadāḥ BHĀG. P. 10, 11, 29. nāvaṁ samāyuktām R. 7, 47,

1. — 2) «Jmd Etwas auftragen, anvertrauen»: ye ‘rthāḥ strīṣu samāyuktāḥ

Spr. 4896. — 3) (feindlich) «zusammenstossen mit» (acc.): yathā nāyaṁ

samāyuñjyāddhārtarāṣṭrān (so die ed. Bomb.) MBH. 4, 1603. — 4)

«verbinden —, zusammenbringen mit» (instr.): dhūmrākṣeṇa samāyuktaḥ

(feindlich) «zusammengestossen mit» R. 6, 18, 20. agninā «in Berührung

gekommen mit» MBH. 15, 1072. «verbunden —, versehen —, ausgerüstet

—, ausgestattet mit» (instr. oder im comp. vorangehend) 3,3017. HARIV.

10197. R.5,93,8. Spr. 2822. SŪRYAS. 13,17. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 79,15. M.

12,28. BHAG. 15,14. MBH.3,2783. 13,5232. HARIV. 4595.

R.1,62,18.2,91,22 (100,19 GORR.).3,27,17. 42,18.5,14,31.6,93,23.

MṚCCH. 34,16. Spr. 4622. 4782. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 54,121. MĀRK. P. 32,35.

Verz. d. Oxf. H. 40,b,37. PAÑCAR.1,7,2. 65. — Vgl. samāyoga. — caus.

«versehen mit»: na taddhanurmandabalena śakyaṁ maurvyā

samāyojayitum MBH. 1, 7200.

abhisamā, -yukta «verbunden —, versehen mit» (instr.): akīrtyā MBH.

12, 3478.

ud med. P. 1, 3, 64, Vārtt. VOP. 23, 51. 1) «sich rüsten, Anstalten

treffen» Verz. d. Oxf. H. 257,a,1. rantum DAŚAK. 32, 15. udyukta

«gerüstet, schlagfertig, zur That bereit, an’s Werk gehend, mit allem

Eifer sich an Etwas machend» MBH. 7, 4268. R. 1, 1, 45. 4, 12, 7. udyukto

vidyāntamadhigacchati Spr. 1093. KĀM. NĪTIS. 8, 50. 13, 59. 15, 60. 18,

43. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 4, 24. 15, 20. KATHĀS. 45, 35. 134. RĀJA-TAR. 5,

331. MĀRK. P. 99, 12. BHAṬṬ. 5, 16. agnipraveśāya KATHĀS. 101, 352.

dānādhyayanayajñeṣu MĀRK. P. 50, 75. iṣvastraṁ prati MBH. 1, 5231.

viśvakṣayodyukta RĀJA-TAR. 2, 19. 3, 1. Spr. 2573. AK. 3, 1, 9. — 2) «sich

auf und davon machen»: sa ha tata eva śaryāta udyuyuje ŚAT. BR. 4, 1,

5, 7. tadahareva paurṇamāsena haviṣeṣṭvodyuñjīran LĀṬY. 10, 16, 6. 7.

yathā hastī hastinyāḥ padena padamudyuje etwa so v. a. «auf Schritt und

Tritt nacheilt» AV. 6, 70, 2; die Stelle ist demnach u. pada 8) zu streichen

und u. 1) zu stellen. — Vgl. udyoga fg. — caus. «aufregen, anfeuern, zur

That antreiben»: yuddhāya HARIV. 5133. R. 5, 48, 13. MBH. 3, 1367. 5,

70. HARIV. 6579. R. 6, 27, 22. 31, 22.

ākhaṇḍalodyoṁjitākāṇḍacaṇḍāmbuvāhāḥ «erregt, zusammengetrieben»

PRAB. 81, 8.

samud caus. «anfeuern»: samarāya PRAB. 85, 18. MĀLAV. 9, 17.

upa med. P. 1, 3, 64. VOP. 23, 51. ausnahmsweise auch act. 1)

«anschirren» ṚV. 1, 39, 6. 140, 4. gāṁ na dhuryupa yuñjāthe apaḥ 151, 4.

upa nūnaṁ yuyuje vṛṣaṇā harī 8, 4, 11. 10, 102, 7 (act.). AV. 4, 23, 3.

«dazu schirren» ŚAT. BR. 5, 1, 4, 11. — 2) «sich anschliessen»:

mahobhiretāṁ upa yujmahe ṚV. 1, 165, 5. — 3) «sich an Etwas» (loc.)

«machen, sich kümmern um»: nāsaṁpṛṣṭo hyupayuṅkte (vyupayuṅkte v.

l.) parārthe Spr. 3995. — 4) «sich an Jmd anschliessen, in Jmdes Dienste

treten»: na vai prājñā gataśrīkaṁ bhartāramupayuñjate Spr. 4350. — 5)

«sich aneignen, für sich nehmen»: tasyādityo bhāmupayujya bhāti MBH.

13, 7375. caurairhṛtaṁ dhanam M. 8, 40. «annehmen» HARIV. 14546. —

6) «verwenden, anwenden, gebrauchen»: ahīnasūktānyupayupayuñjānā

yanti AIT. BR. 6, 21. den Soma ŚAT. BR. 14, 3, 2, 30. (dhanam)

upayoktuṁ dvijāgryebhyaḥ (so die ed. Bomb.) havyavāhe ca MBH. 2,

1223. 14, 2068. paṇabandhamukhānguṇānajaḥ ṣaḍupāyuṅkta RAGH. 8,

21. BHĀG. P. 7, 13, 8. preṣyabhāvena nāmeyaṁ devīśabdakṣamā satī.

snānīyavastrakriyayā pattrerṇaṁ vopayujyate.. MĀLAV. 87. «geniessen»

(auch von Speisen), «verzehren»: ṣaḍbhāgamupayuñjānāḥ HARIV. 2872.

rājyamupayujyatām MṚCCH. 175, 8. dārādīnupayuṅkte BHĀG. P. 5, 26, 9.

10, 70, 13. annam u.s.w. ĀŚV. GṚHY. 4, 7, 27. LĀṬY. 1, 6, 3. MBH. 1,

709. 715. 734. 3637. 6862. 3, 57. 10064. 14860 (gorasānupabhogāṁśca).

15364. 13, 236. HARIV. 1198. 3794. R. GORR. 2, 56, 30. 95, 15. SUŚR. 1,

20, 6. 113, 9. 128, 5. 2, 75, 2. MEGH. 13. phalānyupāyuṅkta sa

daṇḍanīteḥ RAGH. 18,45. KATHĀS. 37,93. 95. 39,13. 40,50. DAŚAK. in

BENF. Chr. 199,17. fg Verz. d. Oxf. H. 269,a,25. 313,a,12. BHĀG.

P.1,15,11.5,16,24. 20,22. 24,16.6,2,19. BHAṬṬ.8,39. upayokṣyati

(upabhokṣyati ed. Bomb.) MBH. 1, 6221. 3, 12140. na copayuṅkte (agniḥ)

taddāru «verzehrt» Spr. 3384. virahāgnyupayuktadeha BHĀG. P. 10, 29,

35. 9, 2, 14. krameṇāsyopayuñjanti rūpamāyustathaiva ca MBH. 11, 173.

upayuktodakā prapā «verbraucht» R. GORR. 2, 125, 12. — 7) pass. «zur

Anwendung kommen, tauglich —, nützlich —, erforderlich sein, sich

eignen, am Platze sein» MBH. 3, 12739. ubhayameva tatropayujyate

phalaṁ dharmasyaivetarasya ca 5, 1598. nopayujyati karmaṇi HARIV.

11823. R. 5, 73, 22. iyaṁ nṛpāṇāmullāse hrāse vā deśakālayoḥ. — kathā

yuktopayujyate RĀJA-TAR. 1, 21. yadi prāṇyupakārāya deho ‘yaṁ

nopayujyate Spr. 2365. muktāratnasya śāṇāśmagharṣaṇaṁ nopayujyate

3331. 3034. śaradabhrasya śubhratvaṁ vada kutropayujyate 1915. 1962.

māṁsāsthikeśasaṁgho hi kvopayujyata eṣa te KATHĀS. 41, 43.

karmasūpayujyate PRAB. 110, 10.SĀH. D. 85, 2. PAÑCAT. 155, 8.

VEDĀNTAS. (Allah.) No. 112. KULL. zu M. 10, 5. P. 3, 1, 56, Sch.

tasyeyamupayujyate «eignet sich für ihn, ist für ihn bestimmt» BHĀG. P.

9, 23, 37. anupayujyamāna «zu Nichts nützend» UTTARAR. 73, 16 (95, 1).

upayukta «zur Anwendung kommend, nöthig, erforderlich, am Platze

seiend»: yadyadvastūpayuktaṁ ca tasyāḥ KATHĀS. 36, 65. 38, 71. 61, 11.

123, 31. RĀJA-TAR. 4, 525. prayāṇeṣu 588. prabhukāryopayuktāsu

KATHĀS. 53, 140. 22, 38. PRAB. 110, 6. 9. savarṇasaṁjñopayuktāḥ

sthānaprayatnāḥ P. 1, 1, 9, Sch. PAÑCAR. 1, 11, 4. 2, 28.

parārthānupayuktena rājyena KATHĀS. 72, 173. MADHUS. in Ind. St. 1,

16, 10. kimupayukto ‘yametāvadvartanaṁ gṛhṇātyathānupayukto vā so v.

a. «es verdienend» HIT. 98, 14. anupayuktamivātmānaṁ samarthaye

«unwürdig» ŚĀK. 97, 3. — Vgl. upayoktavya («zu geniessen») fgg. — caus.

1) «berühren, zusammenstossen mit» (acc.) BHĀG. P. 5, 16, 25. — 2)

«anwenden» SUŚR. 1, 113, 10. — desid. s. upayuyukṣu.

vyupa = upa 3) Spr. 3995, v. l.

samupa «geniessen, verzehren»: parṇaṁ samupayuktavān MBH. 3,

1538. — caus. dass.: baliṣaḍbhāgamuddhṛtya baliṁ samupayojayet (yaḥ)

MBH. 12, 5233.

ni gewöhnlich med. 1) «anbinden, fesseln an» (loc.), bes. das

Opferthier an den Pfosten: pāśe sa baddho durite ni yujyatām AV. 2, 12,

2. VS. 6, 9. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 4, 14, 7. ŚAT. BR. 3, 7, 3, 3. 9, 1, 22. paridhau

paśuṁ niyuñjanti ĀŚV. ŚR. 9, 2, 4. paśuṁ baddhvā yūpe raśanāyāṁ vā

niyunakti GṚHY. 4, 8, 15. AIT. BR. 7, 16 (niniyoja perf.). ṣaṭśatāni

niyujyante paśūnāṁ madhyame ‘hani Cit. bei GAUḌAP. zu SĀṁKHYAK. 2.

MBH. 14, 2635. R. 1, 13, 31. rajakenāsau (gardabhaḥ)

śasyakṣetramadhye niyuktaḥ HIT. 81, 13. samudro ‘yaṁ niyujyatām R. 5,

92, 17. dhuri «an die Deichsel spannen»: vahantaṁ kiṁ tudasi māṁ

niyujya dhuri mā R. SCHL. 2, 36, 14. so v. a. «vorn an stellen» 5, 2, 3. so

v. a. «die schwerste Arbeit aufbürden» Spr. 280, v. l. «verbinden,

zusammenfügen»: kapoto («eine best. Stellung der Hände») bhītau u.s.w.

niyujyate (vgl. muṣṭiṁ, añjaliṁ bandh) Cit. bei ŚAṁK. zu ŚĀK. 78, 9. — 2)

«an Jmd binden» so v. a. «von Jmd abhängig machen»: taṁ gṛṇate ni

yuṁgdhi AV. 8, 3, 11 (v. l. ṚV.). bṛhaspatiṣṭvā niyunaktu mahyam ĀŚV.

GṚHY. 1, 21, 7. ātmanyeva śriyam ŚAT. BR. 5, 5, 3, 6. bhṛśaṁ

niyuktastasyāṁ hi madanena «an sie gekettet» R. 5, 20, 6. — 3) den Blick,

den Geist, die Gedanken «richten auf» (loc. dat.): niyuktā yatra vā dṛṣṭiḥ

MBH. 1, 7694. tasya vināśāya śīghraṁ rājā mano niyuṅkte KULL. zu M. 7,

12. ātmā sukhe niyoktavyaḥ Spr. 2723. «stellen an» (loc.): gurusthāne na

māṁ vīra niyoktuṁ tvamarhasi MBH. 3, 1858. «bringen auf»: kathamimāṁ

pitṛpaitāmahe mārge niyoktumahamutsahe 1, 6156. «Jmd anhalten —,

anweisen zu, anstellen bei, zu, betrauen —, beauftragen mit»:

cāturvarṇyaṁ ca loke ‘sminsve sve dharme niyokṣyati R. 1, 1, 92. MBH. 5,

1561. ŚĀK. 9, 13. hite Spr. 2174. yaṁ tu karmaṇi yasminsa nyayuṅkta

prathamaṁ prabhuḥ M. 1, 28. ākarakarmānte 7, 62. kāryadarśane 8, 9

(act.). kṛtye MBH. 2, 1228. kārye guruṇi KUMĀRAS. 3, 13.

homaturaṁgarakṣaṇe RAGH. 3, 38. vāṇijyavyavahāreṣu KATHĀS. 43, 70.

lekhasya lekhane 267. 71, 82. BHĀG. P. 10, 73, 24. HIT. 41, 22. 62, 20.

90, 18. prāṇeṣu ca dhaneṣu ca Spr. 2560. niyukteyaṁ vanavāse R. 2, 37,

16. kāryeṣu M. 9, 231. MBH. 4, 131. aśveṣu 317. R. 2, 66, 7 (68, 17

GORR.). 4, 9, 7. P. 6, 2, 75. ŚĀK. 13, 23. RAGH. 5, 29. 6, 26. 31. dvāre

PAÑCAR. 1, 7, 76. MĀLAV. 11. Spr. 1583. 2572. 3472 (Conj.). KATHĀS.

14, 35. P. 4, 4, 70, Sch. BHĀG. P. 5, 21, 16. 8, 14, 1. HIT. 91, 11, v. l. 97,

17. BHAṬṬ. 3, 5. sa putramekaṁ rājyāya pālayeti niyujya R. 1, 55, 11 (sa

putramekaṁ rājyāya niyujya paripālane GORR. 56, 11).

duhitaramatithisatkārāya niyujya ŚĀK. 7, 15. śuśrūṣāyai mama KATHĀS.

1, 40. pitrā niyukto vanavāsāya R. 4, 4, 5. BHĀG. P. 5, 21, 17. rājñāṁ

saṁmānanārthaṁ ca paurāṇāṁ ca tena nyayujyata KATHĀS. 14, 34. so

‘pi niyuktavān. gūḍhamantaḥpure tatra niśi nārīmanvekṣitum 3, 70. 34,

68. rājyabhāraniyukta «betraut —, beauftragt mit» R. 1, 27, 18. 5, 70, 9.

Spr. 884. vṛṣabha eṣa rājñā piṅgalakenāraṇyarakṣārthaṁ

senāpatirniyuktaḥ «als Heerführer eingesetzt» HIT. 58, 17. etasyātmajau —

varṣapatī niyujya BHĀG. P. 5, 20, 31. prakṛtistvāṁ niyokṣyati «anhalten,

dazu treiben» BHAG. 18, 59. MBH. 3, 2758. 5, 6084 (act.). HARIV. 11161

(act.). R. 1, 54, 16 (55, 16 GORR.). R. GORR. 2, 20, 12. 5, 78, 23. Spr.

4014. niyujyatām HIT. 88, 17. niyujyamāna Spr. 3544. MBH. 1, 6943.

niyoktavya 4862. 5, 6084. M. 9, 64. YĀJÑ. 2, 3. niyukta «angehalten,

angewiesen, angestellt, beauftragt, aufgefordert» M. 3, 173. 5, 27. 35. 9,

58. fgg. 63. 144. 167. R. 1, 14, 35 (31 GORR.). 2, 54, 15 (17 GORR.). 90,

12. 101, 7. 105, 36. fg. (114, 24. fg. GORR.). 107, 6. 7. RAGH. 16, 38.

KATHĀS. 14, 54. 18, 276. 20, 88. 24, 222. 28, 93. BHĀG. P. 2, 6, 31. 5,

10, 4. BRAHMA-P. in LA. (III) 57, 16. aniyukta M. 9, 143. 147. YĀJÑ. 3,

288. HARIV. 7338. R. GORR. 2, 62, 2. 95, 16. KATHĀS. 60, 112. niyukta

m. «ein Angestellter, Beamter» Spr. 1009. — 4) «Jmd zur Rechenschaft

ziehen»: na sa rājñā niyoktavyo na nikṣeptuśca bandhubhiḥ M. 8, 186. —

5) «Jmd» (loc.) «Etwas» (acc.) «aufladen, auftragen»: gurukāryāṇi sarvāṇi

niyujya kuśikātmaje R. 1, 24, 22. bhavadbhiryanniyujyate BHĀG. P. 10,

41, 48. — 6) «verwenden»: gāthām PĀR. GṚHY. 1, 15. GOBH. 1, 4, 34.

vāsaḥ 3, 1, 9. — 7) niyukta «bestimmt, vorgeschrieben»:

pāṭhīnarohitāvādyau niyuktau havyakavyayoḥ M. 5, 16. niyuktam adv.

«durchaus, auf jeden Fall, nothwendig» ṚV. PRĀT. 3, 12. 11, 23. P. 4, 4,

66. — 8) kṛtatretāniyuktāni HARIV. 523 fehlerhaft für kṛtatretādiyuktāni,

wie die neuere Ausg. liest. — Vgl. niyukti, niyoktar fgg. — caus. 1)

«anspannen»: vṛṣabhau dhuri niyojya HIT. 46, 13. «anbinden, befestigen»:

svakaṇṭhe pāśaṁ niyojya PAÑCAT. 135, 4. ratnaṁ cāmīkaraniyojitam

«gefasst in» Spr. 5020. — 2) «hinstellen, aufstellen»: pāśāstatra niyojitāḥ

HIT. 21, 10. śanaiścaro grahāṇāṁ ca madhye pitrā niyojitaḥ MĀRK. P. 78,

33. «legen —, auftragen auf» Verz. d. Oxf. H. 103,b,8. «hinbringen zu»:

keśeṣvākṛṣya tāṁ raṇḍāṁ pākhaṇḍeṣu niyojaya PRAB. 41, 17. «richten

auf»: brahmaniyojitātman KUMĀRAS. 3, 15. «Jmd versetzen —, bringen in,

zu»: dāsye MBH. 1, 1237. kṛcchre R. GORR. 2, 10, 12. duḥkhe 78, 3.

duḥkhamārge Spr. 253. saṁdehe PAÑCAT. 8, 21. «anhalten —, zwingen

zu»: hiteṣu M. 9, 324. dharme MBH. 1, 6191. vinaye KĀM. NĪTIS. 1, 64.

karmaṇi ghore BHAG. 3, 1. akṛtyeṣu Spr. 2689. an ein Amt, eine

Beschäftigung «stellen», in eine Würde «einsetzen»: svapade KATHĀS. 22,

58. asminviṣaye PRAB. 37, 8. kaccinmukhyāśca mukhyeṣu (sc. kāryeṣu)

madhyameṣu ca madhyamāḥ. jaghanyāśca jaghanyeṣu bhṛtyāstāta

niyojitāḥ.. R. GORR. 2, 109, 20. yauvarājye R. SCHL. 2, 26, 23. mantritve

KATHĀS. 6, 70. 25, 276. MĀRK. P. 78, 31. SARVADARŚANAS. 86, 9.

PAÑCAT. 24, 5. kulyārthe HARIV. 2098. tava kautukapratikarmaṇi

KATHĀS. 45, 295. grāmyadharmeṣu PAÑCAT. 31, 6 (27, 15 ed orn.).

arthasya saṁgrahe vyaye ca M. 9, 11. ratnānāṁ cānvavekṣaṇe.

dakṣiṇānāṁ ca vai dāne MBH. 2, 1292. alipaṅktiranekaśastvayā guṇakṛtye

dhanuṣo niyojitā KUMĀRAS. 4, 15. R. 2, 36, 4. prājñe,

mūrkheniyojyamāne Spr. 1887. fg. tadbalāni sārasādayaḥ senāpatayo

niyojyantām HIT. 102, 2. «Jmd anweisen —, antreiben zu, auffordern»

(dat.): vanavāsāya R. GORR. 2, 17, 20. rāvaṇocchittaye KATHĀS. 15, 82.

kharjūrānayanaṁ prati 61, 32. apatyārtham M. 9, 68. R. 1, 38, 10.

divyārthe PAÑCAT. 97, 1. ahameva tvayā tatra kimarthaṁ na niyojitaḥ R.

4, 16, 47. BHAG. 3, 36. MBH. 4, 102. HARIV. 9695. R. GORR. 2, 16, 11. 3,

33, 2. 5, 28, 10. 56, 30. MĀRK. P. 51, 26. fg. KUSUM. 23, 8. — 3)

«hingeben»: vittaṁ supātre yo niyojayet Spr. 1862. yadi

svayamevātmānaṁ vadhāya niyojayati PAÑCAT. 70, 3. «übertragen»:

uttamādhamamadhyāni buddhvā kāryāṇi pārthivaḥ.

uttamādhamamadhyeṣu puruṣeṣu niyojayet.. MĀTSYA-P. 89 im ŚKDR. u.

madhya adj. — 4) «anwenden, in’s Werk setzen»: pūrvaṁ daivaṁ (sc.

kāryaṁ) niyojayet M. 3, 204. buddhim «den Verstand anwenden» Spr.

179. — 5) «Jmd mit Etwas» (instr.) «versehen, einer Sache theilhaftig

machen»: smaraṁ vapuṣā svena niyojayiṣyati KUMĀRAS. 4, 42.

śāsanaśatena PAÑCAT. 4, 25. abhyāgatakriyayā 117, 12. apathaiḥ so v. a.

«beschwören» VARĀH. BṚH. S. 88, 41. deśatyāgena «belegen —,

bestrafen mit» (unter niyojayitavya ungenau übersetzt) PAÑCAT. 261, 6.

anuni so v. a. ni 2), mit loc. oder dat.: brahmaṇyeva

kṣatramanuniyunakti AIT. BR. 2, 33. PAÑCAV. BR. 18, 1, 14. 19, 16, 6.

KĀṬH. 29, 9.

upani med. «ketten an» (loc.) KĀṬH. 29, 9.

vini med. P. 1, 3, 64, Vārtt. selten act. 1) «lösen, abtrennen»: hayeṣu

viniyukteṣu «vom Wagen abgelöst» MBH. 1, 5491. pass. «auseinander

fallen»: (gṛhāṇi, dehāni) kālena viniyujyante 11, 91. — 2) «abschiessen»:

viniyokṣyāmyahaṁ (viniryokṣyāmi SCHL.) bāṇānnṛvājigajamarmasu R. ed.

Bomb. 2, 23, 37. «richten auf»: pratyekaṁ viniyuktātmā KUMĀRAS. 2, 31.

— 3) «Jmd stellen an, anweisen zu, bestimmen zu, anstellen,

beauftragen»: śeṣāṁ senāṁ guhādvāri viniyujya HARIV. 8054.

rakṣārthaṁ yajñavāṭasya pāṇḍavānviniyujya 8053. 7048. kārye tvāṁ

viniyokṣyāmi MBH. 1, 4152. kārye ‘tra viniyujyatām R. 5, 2, 6. viniyuñjīta

rājye tvām MBH. 9, 233. R. 4, 9, 4. aśve 7, 92, 2. viniyuṅkte

bhogabhuktaye puṁsaḥ SARVADARŚANAS. 88, 16. yathā

samrāḍevādhikṛtānviniyuṅkte PRAŚNOP. 3, 4. viniyuṅkṣva mām MBH. 14,

1650. R. 2, 59, 20. 4, 63, 23. 7, 13, 3. sakhye ca viniyujyatām «er werde

in die Freundschaft eingesetzt» so v. a. «er werde zum Freunde gemacht»

HARIV. 4034. — 4) «Etwas anwenden, verwenden, gebrauchen»

UTTARAR. 109, 14 (148, 10). KATHĀS. 22, 29. 53, 97. 90, 23. ŚAṁK. zu

BṚH. ĀR. UP. S. 271. (aviniyuktatva). 303. zu CHĀND. UP. S. 51. KULL. zu

M. 8, 30. 212. 11, 25. SARVADARŚANAS. 124, 17. kiṁcidviniyujya ca

«Etwas davon geniessend» DHŪRTAS. 95, 9; eben so und zwar mit

kleiner Schrift als scenische Bemerkung ist zu lesen 90, 10. — Vgl.

viniyoga fg. — caus. 1) «Jmd an Etwas stellen, anweisen zu, beauftragen

mit»: vināyakaḥ karmavighnasiddhyarthaṁ viniyojitaḥ YĀJÑ. 1, 270.

teṣāmutpādanārthāya mayā tvaṁ viniyojitaḥ HARIV. 3003. astreṣu 9593.

viniyoge ‘smin R. 3, 60, 38. yo yatra kuśalaḥ kārye taṁ tatra viniyojayet

Spr. 2556. KĀM. NĪTIS. 5, 76. naraṁ paśutve viniyojitam «zum Opferthier

erkoren» R. GORR. 1, 63, 7. guhyakādhipatitve MĀRK. P. 108, 20.

mayātra viniyojitaḥ 132, 37. R. 4, 20, 11. — 2) «Jmd Etwas übertragen»:

sarvametattu bhṛtyeṣu viniyojayet M. 7, 226. — 3) «Jmd» (dat.) «Etwas»

(acc.) «anbieten, darreichen» PAÑCAR. 3, 7, 25. — 4) «anwenden,

gebrauchen» ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 5, 5. 6, 4. SUŚR. 1, 58, 12. — 5) «verrichten»:

kalāsevākarma PAÑCAR. 3, 7, 19.

saṁni 1) «bringen —, versetzen in»: tato māṁ viṣame hyadya vyasane

saṁniyokṣyati MĀRK. P. 99, 20. — 2) «Jmd anweisen»: tadarthaṁ

saṁniyokṣyāmi sarvāneva divaukasaḥ MBH. 1, 2500. — Vgl. saṁniyoga. —

caus. 1) «bringen auf, in, versetzen in»: tadenaṁ tanayaṁ mārge

pravṛtteḥ saṁniyojaya MĀRK. P. 26, 27. kimarthaṁ divyamātmānaṁ

mānuṣye saṁnyayojayat HARIV. 2140. — 2) «stellen an, anweisen zu,

betrauen mit, beauftragen»: sācivye saṁniyojitaḥ Spr. 2548. rājñāṁ tu

pratipūjārthaṁ saṁjayaṁ saṁnyayojayat MBH. 2, 1291. R. GORR. 1, 39,

23. kṣīrasaṁbhāvanārthāya kṛttikāḥ saṁnyayojayat R. SCHL. 1, 38, 23.

vasiṣṭhaṁ saṁnyayojayat. svadāreṣu (sc. apatyārtham) MBH. 1, 6912.

tatra tāḥ saṁniyojaya BRAHMAP. in LA. (III) 50, 22. MBH. 4, 462. — 3)

«zuweisen, bestimmen»: śubhāśubhaṁ samabhyeti vidhinā saṁniyojitam

Spr. 10.

nis, partic. niryukta HARIV. 3438. 4645. 11785. 12538; statt dessen

die neuere Ausg. nirmukta. st. sāraniryuktaṁ 4530 hat die neuere Ausg.

sādhunirvyūhaṁ und st. cāruniryukto 4655 cārubhiryukto. 4528 liest die

neuere Ausg. dṛḍhaniryukta st. -saṁyukta der älteren. — Vgl. niryoga.

vinis «abschiessen»: viniryokṣyāmyahaṁ (viniyokṣyāmi ed. Bomb.)

bāṇānnṛvājigajamarmasu R. 2, 23, 37. wohl nur Druckfehler.

pra med., ausnahmsweise auch act. P. 1, 3, 64. VOP. 23, 51. 1)

«anschirren, anspannen»: pṛṣatīḥ ṚV. 1, 85, 5. 5, 52, 8. wohl auch 10, 33,

1. prayuñjatī diva eti 5, 47, 1. yānena gobhiḥ śvetaiḥ prayuktena R. 1, 17,

14. goprayuktadāna so v. a. goprayuktayānadāna MBH. 13, 3534.

prayuktendriyavājin BRAHMA-P. in LA. (III) 52, 12. — 2) «in Bewegung

setzen, werfen, schleudern, abschiessen»: naitāni (astrāṇi) niradhiṣṭhāne

prayujyante MBH. 3, 12309. 12017 (act.). 5, 7173. 7291 (act. und med.).

RAGH. 7, 58. KATHĀS. 39, 58. 50, 65. BHĀG. P. 3, 19, 22. na

sannavāhāya — prāyuṅkta bhūyaḥ sa gadām 6, 11, 12. paramāstraṁ

prayuktam MBH. 1, 211. 5, 7282. Spr. 4945. RAGH. 2, 34. 12, 99. MĀRK.

P. 134, 44. suprayuktaśara H. 772. asiḥ — īśaprayuktaḥ «geschwungen»

BHĀG. P. 6, 8, 24. akṣānprayoktum «die Würfel werfen» MBH. 4, 224.

marutprayuktā bālalatāḥ «bewegt» RAGH. 2, 10. śāpaḥ prayukto ‘yaṁ

mayi tvayā «geschleudert» MBH. 1, 6734. sthāne roṣaḥ prayuktaḥ

«ausgelassen» 6845. uṣo ye te pra yāmeṣu yuñjate manaḥ «richten auf»

ṚV. 1, 48, 4. jātopāyaprayuktadhī RĀJA-TAR. 4, 525. Worte u.s.w.

«richten an, vorbringen, hersagen, aussprechen»: devatāyāṁ stutiṁ

prayuṅkte NIR. 7, 1. prāyuñjanta tadāśiṣaḥ R. 1, 13, 38 (35 GORR.).

rāmalakṣmaṇasītānām 2, 32, 11 (act.). 55, 7. rāmāya R. GORR. 2, 32, 10.

4, 8, 57 (act.). RAGH. 5, 35. 11, 5. 15, 8. BHĀG. P. 4, 9, 59. 7, 10, 33. 9,

3, 19. P. 8, 2, 83, Sch. prāsthānikaṁ svastyayanam RAGH. 2, 70. M. 5,

152. maṅgalāni R. 3, 6, 12. mā ca śāstrānugāṁ vācaṁ prayuñjīta kadā ca

na R. GORR. 2, 79, 11. vācā svarasaṁpatprayuktayā 4, 63, 11. KĀM.

NĪTIS. 17, 15. BHĀG. P. 6, 10, 28. BHAṬṬ. 8, 39. dveṣaprayuktaṁ vacaḥ

KATHĀS. 34, 195. prītivākyāni hṛdyāni prayujya munaye HARIV. 7233. R.

3, 38, 27. giraṁ nastvatprabodhaprayuktām RAGH. 5, 74. tisro mātrā

mṛtyumatyaḥ prayuktāḥ «ausgesprochen» PRAŚNOP. 5, 6. gauḥ

samyakprayuktā, duṣprayuktā Spr. 4034. SĀH. D. 1, 18. mantro hīnaḥ

svarato varṇato vā mithyā prayukto na tamarthamāha «ein

unvollständiger oder ein nach Betonung oder Laut falsch hergesagter

Spruch» ŚIKṢĀ 52. susvareṇa suvaktreṇa prayuktaṁ brahma 17. evaṁ

varṇāḥ prayoktavyā nāvyaktā na ca pīḍitāḥ 21. Schol. zu JAIM. 1, 1, 5.

prayuñjīthā rañjayansāma kiṁcana KATHĀS. 6, 54. kiṁ bravīṣīti

yannāṭhye vinā pātraṁ prayujyate «gesprochen wird» Cit. beim Schol. zu

ŚĀK. 31, 7. — 3) «Jmd antreiben, anweisen, heissen» BHAṬṬ. 8, 96.

bhartrā dhruvadarśanāya prayujyamānā KUMĀRAS. 7, 85. KATHĀS. 33,

95. garbhasyotpāṭane mama 26, 191. HARIV. 10314. atra prayujyate

sarge prakṛtiranena WILSON, SĀṁKHYAK. S. 183. BHAṬṬ. 3, 54.

araṇyayāne sukare pitā mā prāyuṅkta rājye bata duṣkare tvām 51.

prayujyamāna als Erkl. von prayojya («der angewiesen wird» neben

prayojaka «der da anweist»; unter d. Ww. unrichtig erklärt) ZdmG.7, 168,

N. 1. atha kena prayukto ‘yaṁ pāpaṁ carati pūruṣaḥ BHAG. 3, 36. aguru-

GOBH. 3, 1, 17. R. 3, 51, 27. 4, 8, 23. 57, 14. KĀM. NĪTIS. 6, 12. RAGH.

7, 22. 12, 46. KUMĀRAS. 1, 21. KATHĀS. 3, 41. 13, 141. 17, 50. RĀJA-

TAR. 4, 116. BHĀG. P. 3, 2, 30. 9, 7, 2. HIT. 112, 10. DAŚAK. in BENF.

Chr. 192, 20. BHAṬṬ. 6, 133. mārutiṁ dūtaṁ prāyuṅkta «erkor» Māruti

«zum Boten» 88. KUMĀRAS. 3, 6. — 4) «stellen an» (loc.), «setzen» BHĀG.

P. 5, 23, 6. atrātmagatamityetatkavinā prākprayuktam Schol. zu ŚĀK. 13,

8. samāsa upasarjanasaṁjñakaṁ pūrvaṁ prayoktavyam Schol. zu P. 2, 2,

30. VOP. 3, 1. 8, 1. «legen auf»: tasyārṣāstraṁ dhanuṣi prayuñjataḥ

BHĀG. P. 4, 11, 3. — 5) «Jmd hinführen zu, auf, bringen in» (acc.):

prayujyamāne mayi tāṁ śuddhāṁ bhāgavatīṁ tanūm BHĀG. P. 1, 6, 29.

gatimaṇvīm 3, 25, 36. evaṁ manaḥ (acc.) karma (nom.) vaśaṁ prayuṅkte

5, 5, 6. — 6) «verbinden mit»: pramadā martyānpra yunakṣi dhīraḥ AV. 19,

56, 1. — 7) «in Thätigkeit setzen, anwenden, gebrauchen; anstellen,

vollziehen; feiern» (ein Opfer u.s.w.): ete devāstriḥ saṁvatsarasya

prayujyante TBR. 1, 6, 2, 2. śakvarīṁ śvo yajñe prayoktāse TS. 2, 6, 2, 3.

2, 6, 5. sarvebhyaḥ kāmebhyo yajñaḥ prayujyate 4, 11, 2. 5, 7, 1. pātrāṇi

(yajñapātrāṇi prayunakti act. P. 1, 3, 64. 8, 1, 15, Sch.; prayunakti sruvam

VOP. 23, 51.) 6, 5, 11, 1. yajñādeva tadyajñaṁ prayuṅkte «aus dem Opfer

nimmt er was er zum Opfer verwendet» TBR. 3, 2, 5, 6. 3, 9, 12. 7, 4, 1.

cāturmāsyāni ĀŚV. ŚR. 2, 15, 1. 9, 2, 3. ŚAT. BR. 1, 8, 3, 27. 6, 6, 1, 15.

KAUŚ. 7. 8. LĀṬY. 6, 2, 9. 15. 19. prayuktānāṁ punaraprayogameke

KAUŚ. 63. eṣa eteṣāṁ paśūnāṁ prayuktatamo yadajaḥ «am meisten

gebraucht» AIT. BR. 2, 8. godānārthaṁ (-rthe ed. Bomb.) prayuñjīta

rohiṇīm MBH. 13, 3669. vāhinīm RAGH. 11, 5. BHĀG. P. 1, 10, 32.

āsanam, yānam, saṁdhim, vigraham, dvaidham, saṁśrayam M. 7, 161. 8,

130. sāma, dānam, bhadem, daṇḍam YĀJÑ. 1, 345. 355. MBH. 4, 690. 5,

301. R. GORR. 2, 6, 25. 89, 1. KATHĀS. 34, 200. nītim 5, 44. 16, 55. 46,

133. vidyām «einen Zauberspruch» 33, 99. 42, 35. 46, 111. fg. 120, 56.

BHĀG. P. 9, 24, 32. māyām 4, 10, 29. M. 7, 104. R. 6, 7, 8. kuśastram

SUŚR. 1, 94, 15. 134, 15. HARIV. 8457. ŚRUT. 6. 23. Spr. 1522. 4932.

KATHĀS. 30, 99 (act.). BHĀG. P. 4, 18, 3. MĀRK. P. 41, 12 (act.). Schol.

zu KAP. 1, 62. athetyayaṁ śabdo ‘dhikārārthaḥ prayujyate

SARVADARŚANAS. 135, 9. 13. gṛṇātistvavapūrvo na prayujyata eva «ist

nicht im Gebrauch» PAT. zu P. 1, 3, 51. sadbhāve sādhubhāve ca

sadityetatprayujyate BHAG. 17, 26. kriyāḥ samyakprayuktāḥ «vollzogen»

PRAŚNOP. 5, 6. arcāṁ prayuñjmahe (so ed. Bomb.) MBH. 2, 1384. 5,

7466. gurupūjām 3, 1835. 13, 4901. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 43, 11. 48, 73.

namaskāram MBH. 3, 2206. satkriyām KUMĀRAS. 5, 32. 39. 6, 52.

paricaryāḥ BHĀG. P. 4, 8, 58. agniśuśrūṣām M. 2, 248. yajñam 5, 152.

āhvānam MBH. 13, 3670. prayuktapāṇigrahaṇopacārau RAGH. 7, 86.

maṇiḥ prayuktasaṁskāraḥ 3, 18. śāntim VARĀH. BṚH. S. 46, 3. 17. 48,

82. agnihotram HARIV. 15373. karmābhicārikam RĀJA-TAR. 6, 121.

nīrājanāvidhīn RAGH. 17, 12. ārdrākṣatāroṣaṇam 7, 25. balim VARĀH.

BṚH. S. 59, 11. prayuktaṁ rākṣasaiḥ saha. vairam «begonnen,

unternommen» R. 3, 67, 12. PRAB. 55, 11. na khalu mayā prayuktamidam

«nicht ich habe es ja angestellt» MĀLAV. 19. adhikṣepāpamānādeḥ

prayuktasya pareṇa «zugefügt» SĀH. D. 95. krauryaṁ me tvayi prayuktam

ŚĀK. 107, 1. suprayuktasya dambhasya «wohl ausgeführt» Spr. 3271.

«aufführen» (ein Schauspiel u.s.w.): mṛcchakaṭikaṁ nāma prakaraṇaṁ

prayoktum MṚCCH. 1, 11. «bewirken, hervorbringen» SARVADARŚANAS.

126, 15. 127, 1. 152, 22. prayuñjanbhayamindrayoṣitām BHĀG. P. 8, 15,

23. ye pracalairvilocanaistavākṣisādṛśyamiva prayuñjate KUMĀRAS. 5, 35.

ārohaṇārthaṁ navayauvanena kāmasya sopānamiva prayuktam 1, 39.

«handeln, verfahren»: atha māṭhavyaṁ prati (māṭhavye v. l.) bhavatā

kimevaṁ prayuktam ŚĀK. 95, 13. — 8) «ausleihen, borgen» («zum

Vortheil anwenden») M. 8, 49. 146. YĀJÑ. 2, 44. aprayujyamāna (das

folgende prayojanatyakta als Glosse zu streichen) PAÑCAT. ed. orn. 3,

17. — 9) pass. «entsprechen, am Platze sein»: tādṛgbhāryāyāṁ

mṛtāyāmutsavaḥ kartuṁ prayujyate PAÑCAT. 224, 24. tadevāprayuktam

ed. orn. 60, 4. nītividhiprayuktā (siddhiḥ) Spr. 145. anuṣṭhitaṁ

prayujyatāṁ siddhaye so v. a. «führe zum Ziele» MĀLAV. 45, 10. — Vgl.

prayukti, prayuj, prayoktar fgg., prayogin, prayogya fgg., prayojya. —

caus. 1) «werfen, schleudern, abschiessen»: astram MBH. 3, 11988. mayi

5, 7171. 7292. āśiṣaḥ «Segenswünsche hersagen» R. GORR. 2, 17, 13.

pituḥ putrāya yaddveṣo maraṇāya prayojitaḥ «ausgelassen» BHĀG. P. 7,

4, 46. manaḥ «den Geist auf einen Punkt richten» ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 2, 10. —

2) «Jmd antreiben, anweisen, absenden» BHĀG. P. 5, 5, 17. SADDH. P. 4,

18,a. araṇye «in den Wald weisen» VP. bei MUIR, ST. 1, 147, 4. «Jmd an

ein Geschäft stellen»: mā sma lubdhāṁśca mūrkhāṁśca kāmārtheṣu

prayūyujaḥ MBH. 12, 2722. — 3) «anwenden, gebrauchen» MBH. 18,116.

SUŚR.2,363,20. ŚRUT. 14. KĀM. NĪTIS.7,54. 17,60. 19,35. SĀH. D. 295.

432. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 103,b,25. SADDH. P.4,18,a. SARVADARŚANAS.

100,17. «üben, erweisen»: ānṛśaṁsyam M. 3, 112. bhagavati bhaktiyogaḥ

prayojitaḥ BHĀG. P. 1, 2, 7. 3, 32, 23. nājñātabalavīryeṣu

pumānkiṁcitprayojayet Spr. 1522. «unternehmen, beginnen»:

anutiṣṭhetsamārabdhamanārabdhaṁ prayojayet KĀM. NĪTIS. 11, 57.

vṛddhim «Zinsen nehmen» M. 10, 117. prayogam «Geld auf Zinsen geben»

SADDH. P.4,35,b. 36,a. «aufführen, darstellen» HARIV. 8456. fg. eka eka

sūtradhāraḥ sarvaṁ prayojayati SĀH. D. 129, 17. 165, 12. «darstellen

lassen von» (instr.) UTTARAR. 86, 18 (111, 7). — 4) «bezwecken» P. 6, 3,

62, Sch. — 5) «zur Anwendung kommen» gaṇa 1. kṣubhnādi zu P. 8, 4, 39.

— 6) «Jmd» (dat.) «Etwas» (acc.) «übertragen»: sāmnaivārthaṁ tato

lipsetkarma cāsmai prayojayet MBH. 3, 1256. — desid. «anzuwenden

Willens sein»: śabdānprayuyukṣamāṇaḥ PAT. in MAHĀBH. S. 52.

atipra «abschliessen von» (instr.): yathā yūyamanyā vo anyāmati mā

prayukta TS. 4, 3, 11, 4. sarveṇaivainamindriyeṇāti prayuṅkte 7, 2, 7, 4.

anupra med. 1) «hinten anfügen, anfügen nach» (abl.) P. 3, 1, 40. 1, 3,

63, Sch. VOP. 8, 56. — 2) «verfolgen, einholen»: paścādanuprayuṅkṣe tam

AV. 11, 2, 13. TBR. 1, 8, 1, 1. 3, 9, 2, 1. ŚAT. BR. 13, 1, 4, 1. 2, 5, 1. «sich

anschliessen, nachfolgen»: bhago anuprayuṅktāmindra etu purogavaḥ AV.

12, 1, 40. — Vgl. anuprayoga.

abhipra med. «anfassen, angreifen, bemeistern»:

devāstṛtīyasavanātprātaḥsavanamabhiprāyuñjata ŚĀÑKH. BR. 14, 5.

(asurān) devāścāturmāsyairabhiprāyuñjata TBR. 1, 5, 6, 3. ākūtyā hi

puruṣo yajñamabhiprayuṅkte TS. 6, 1, 2, 2.

pratipra 1) act. «anfügen statt eines andern, substituiren» PAÑCAV.

BR. 7, 10, 8. — 2) med. «abtragen» (eine Schuld): ṛṇaṁ pratiprayuñjānaḥ

MBH. 9, 282. ṛṇaṁ tatpratiyuñjānaḥ ed. Bomb.

vipra «trennen von» (instr.) so v. a. «berauben»: taṁ prāṇairviprayujya

MBH. 1, 6735. pass. «getrennt werden von» (instr.) R. 2, 53, 20 (22

GORR.). viprayukta «nicht in Conjunction stehend mit» VARĀH. BṚH. S.

47, 17 (v. l. vipramukta). «getrennt» MBH. 3, 2647. rāmeṇa R. 1, 22, 8. 4,

19, 19. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 104, 42. abalā- MEGH. 2. bandhana- «frei von»

MṚCCH. 143, 5. maṇi- «ohne — seiend» VARĀH. BṚH. S. 81, 36. sarvataḥ

«entblösst von Allem» MBH. 1, 3631. ākarairviprayuktārthāḥ «keine

Reichthümer aus Minen beziehend» HARIV. 2873 (ākārai- die neuere

Ausg.; NĪLAK. hat sukarairvi- gelesen: sukarairyathocitaiḥ karagrahaiḥ

viśeṣeṇa prayuktārthāḥ) HARIV. 2873. anaviprayuktāḥ (falsche Lesart)

PRAŚNOP. 5, 6 wird erklärt: na viprayuktā aviprayuktā nāviprayuktā

anaviprayuktāḥ. — Vgl. viprayoga. — caus. «trennen von» (instr.),

«berauben»: putreṇeṣṭena kausalyā yayā te viprayojitā R. GORR. 2, 76,

15. patiṁ prāṇairviprayojya 75, 3. «befreien von»: rāmeṇa — triḥsaptakṛtvo

‘haṁ kṣatriyairviprayojitā HARIV. 2946.

saṁpra 1) «anschirren, bespannen»: harisaṁprayuktaṁ

mahendravāham MBH. 3, 11903. rathaṁ saṁprayuktam R. 2, 46, 33. =

samyagānīya darśitam «vorgeführt» Comm. — 2) pass. «verbunden

werden, sich verbinden»: ceti samuccayārtha ubhābhyāṁ saṁprayujyate

NIR. 1, 4. 11. 12. 5, 16. «hinzugefügt werden, sich» (äusserlich)

«anschliessen»: vāṅmātramiva paśyāmi mādhuryaṁ saṁprayujyate

HARIV. 7093. «sich fleischlich vermischen mit»: sā saṁprāyujyata

mantriṇā RĀJA-TAR. 3, 497. saṁprayukta «verbunden, vermischt»:

saṁprayuktairvarauṣadhaiḥ MĀRK. P. 51, 44. kuntyā «verbunden —,

vereinigt mit» MBH. 1, 4474. ūṣmaṇā ṚV. PRĀT. 1, 12. drākṣābhayāṁ

mākṣikasaṁprayuktām SUŚR. 1, 246, 9. gajābhyāṁ saṁprayuktābhyām

«feindlich an einander gekommen» MBH. 7, 5694. patitaiḥ saṁprayuktāḥ

«in Berührung gekommen mit» M. 11, 179. saṁprayukto diṣṭe «gebunden

an, abhängig von» MBH. 7, 1047. mṛgayāsaṁprayukta «beschäftigt mit»

KĀM. NĪTIS. 18, 62. — 3) «Jmd mit Etwas» (instr.) «verbinden» so v. a.

«veranlassen zu»: upacārairaśucibhiḥ saṁprayujya ca tāpasān R. 3, 1, 22.

pass. «theilhaftig werden, sich schuldig machen» YĀJÑ. 3, 129. tenaiva

karmaṇā saṁprayujyate Spr. 4070. — 4) «Jmd antreiben»:

airāvaṇamadhiṣṭhātuṁ pravaraṁ saṁprayuktavān (sa niyuktavān die

neuere Ausg.) HARIV. 8873. śyenā yathaivāmiṣasaṁprayuktāḥ MBH. 3,

15692. — 5) «in Thätigkeit setzen, freien Lauf lassen»: asaṁprayuñjataḥ

(= niyacchataḥ Comm.) prāṇān BHĀG. P. 11, 26, 23. — 6) «ausführen,

vortragen» (einen Gesang) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 199,b, No. 472. — 7)

saṁprayukta «der seine ganze Aufmerksamkeit auf einen Gegenstand

gerichtet hat» MBH. 14, 551. — Vgl. saṁprayoga. — caus. 1) «ausrüsten,

fertig machen»: ratham HARIV. 9284. — 2) «vereinigen, verbinden» MBH.

3, 1153. nānekadinanirvartyakathayā saṁprayojitaḥ «verbunden mit» SĀH.

D. 278. — 3) «vorbringen»: samyakte pṛcchaiṣā saṁprayojitā MBH. 18,

155. — 4) «anwenden, gebrauchen» SĀH. D. 432.

prati 1) «befestigen»: ubhe dhurau prati vahniṁ yunakta ṚV. 10, 101,

10. — 2) «abtragen» (eine Schuld): ṛṇaṁ tatpratiyuñjānaḥ MBH. 9, 282

nach der Lesart der ed. Bomb., ṛṇaṁ pratiprayuñjānaḥ ed. Calc. — Vgl.

pratiyoga. — caus. «auflegen» (den Pfeil auf den Bogen) MBH. 8, 4051. —

Vgl. pratiyojayitavya.

vi 1) «ablösen»: yeṣāṁ caturthaṁ viyunakti vācam AV. 8, 9, 3.

«trennen»: tāṁśca viyunaṅkṣi (!) BHĀG. P. 10, 39, 19. nūnaṁ bhūtāni

bhagavānyunakti viyunakti ca 82, 42. saṁyujyante viyujyante tathā kālena

dehinaḥ Spr. 4787. viyukta «getrennt» M. 7, 214. KUMĀRAS. 5, 26. MEGH.

99. BHĀG. P. 3, 5, 47. MĀRK. P. 125, 24. ŚUK. in LA. (III) 33, 9. viyuktau

«uneins» M. 9, 102. aviyukta «nicht getrennt» KĀM. NĪTIS. 13, 69. 83.

RAGH. 13, 31. pass. «getrennt werden von» (instr.): sa vai

kenacidarthena tayā mando vyayujyata MBH. 3, 2646. R. GORR. 2, 38, 4.

Spr. 4810. KĀM. NĪTIS. 12, 49. MĀRK. P. 21, 102. BHĀG. P. 5, 8, 3. sā

nalena saha viyujyatām Comm. zu NALOD. 3, 5. act. med. «befreien von,

bringen um» (instr., selten abl.): baddhānviyuṅkṣva

magadhāhvayakarmapāśāt BHĀG. P. 10, 70, 29. so ‘hamenam — viyunajmi

dehāt MBH. 3, 10924. taṁ prāṇairviyuñjyāt SUŚR. 1, 94, 19. 116, 11.

pass.: ko ‘dyaiva mayā viyujyatāṁ tavāsuhṛtprāṇayaśaḥsuhṛjjanaiḥ R. 2,

23, 41 (20, 45 GORR.). «verlustig gehen, kommen um» (instr.): na ca

prāṇairviyujyate 1, 32, 19. 6, 36, 68. Spr. 306. KATHĀS. 31, 64. 33, 73.

BHĀG. P. 1, 13, 19. MĀRK. P. 16, 79. vratena M. 5, 91.

arthadharmābhyām, ātmanā 7, 46. R. 5, 76, 22. ŚĀK. 150. Spr. 4025.

RĀJA-TAR. 4, 479. 6, 148. act. in derselben Bed.: ubhāvapi prāṇaiḥ

viyokṣyāvaḥ R. GORR. 2, 66, 37. śarīreṇa viyujya «sich vom Körper befreit

habend» ŚAṁKH. zu BṚH. ĀR. UP. S. 279. viyukta «getrennt von» (instr.

oder im comp. vorangehend), «ermangelnd, frei von, — los»: viyuktā patinā

tena R. 1, 2, 15. 2, 27, 22. RAGH. 13, 63. VIKR. 78, 19. fg. KATHĀS. 45,

358. BHĀG. P. 9, 10, 11. tadviyuktāḥ KATHĀS. 10, 197. (nagarīm)

viyuktāṁ puruṣendreṇa R. GORR. 2, 124, 25. 5, 74, 37. VARĀH. BṚH. S.

53, 37. yānaṁ vāhaviyuktam 46, 60. 77, 28. 81, 3. — 2) med. und pass.

«sich lösen, erschlaffen, nachlassen, weichen»: taccāpi cittabaḍiśaṁ

śanakairviyuṅkte BHĀG. P. 3, 28, 34. ātmaniyamāḥ sahayamāḥ

puruṣaparicaryādaya ekaikaśaḥ katipayenāhargaṇena viyujyamānāḥ kila

sarva evodavasan 5, 8, 5. śanairviyujyate saṁdhyā R. 1, 35, 16. — 3) in

der Stelle vratasthā ca śarīraṁ tvaṁ yadi nāma viyokṣyasi MBH. 5, 7362

fehlerhaft für vimokṣyasi, wie die ed. Bomb. liest und wie schon BENFEY

vermuthet hat. — Vgl. viyoga. — caus. 1) «trennen» MBH. 3, 1153.

KATHĀS. 69, 129. PAÑCAT. 42, 22. viyojitā. mātrā bhrātṛbhiranyaiśca

«getrennt von» MĀRK. P. 70, 6. bhrātṛmātṛviyojitā 5. «Jmd befreien von»

(abl.): tathāraṇyadharmādviyojya grāmyadharmeṣu niyojitaḥ PAÑCAT.

31, 6 (27, 15 ed. orn.). «Jmd bringen um» (instr.): vasiṣṭhaṁ yaḥ

putrairiṣṭairvyayojayat MBH. 1, 2923. R. 2, 53, 19. R. GORR. 2, 34, 12.

śarīreṇa HARIV. 2335. jīvitena R. GORR. 2, 22, 4. prāṇaiḥ MBH. 8, 4178

(med.). R. GORR. 1, 33, 17. 3, 56, 48. PAÑCAT. 90, 6. asubhiḥ DAŚAK. in

BENF. Chr. 196, 12. fg. mayā saiva pattraiḥ śākhā viyojitā MṚCCH. 63, 23.

R. 6, 94, 13. saṁmānena PAÑCAT. 30, 10. RAGH. 9, 66.

rūpamātraviyojita MBH. 3, 2851. — 2) «rauben»: brāhmaṇasyātitheścaiva

svārthe prāṇānviyojayan MBH. 1, 6225.

sam act. 1) «verbinden, in Zusammenhang bringen;

zusammenbringen, vereinigen»: vraje gāvo na saṁyuje ṚV. 8, 41, 6. TS.

2, 5, 7, 5. dvau dvau kāmau ŚAT. BR. 9, 3, 2, 6. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 1, 16, 7.

LĀṬY. 2, 9, 12. 10, 2, 10. 6, 9. chandasī PAÑCAV. BR. 4, 4, 2.

saṁyujyante viyujyante tathā kālena dehinaḥ Spr. 4787. pass. mit ratyā

«sich fleischlich verbinden» PRAŚNOP. 1, 13. strīpumāṁsau yadā

grāmyadharmatayā saṁyujyeyātām ŚAṁK. zu CHĀND. UP. S. 18.

saṁyukta «zusammengefügt»: dṛḍha- HARIV. 4528. -mālyāni R. 5, 14, 52.

«verbunden» im Gegens. zu viyukta «getrennt» M. 7, 214. KATHĀS. 25,

222. von «unmittelbar auf einander folgenden» Consonanten P.6,3,59, Sch.

ŚRUT. 2. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 181,b, No. 413. vedaye na ca saṁyuktān (=

indriyasaṁyuktān Comm.) śabdasparśarasānaham «alle insgesammt» d. i.

«ich kann weder hören, noch fühlen, noch schmecken» R. 2, 64, 67.

saṁyuktametatkṣaramakṣaraṁ ca vyaktāvyaktam d. i. «sowohl

vergänglich als auch unvergänglich» ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 1, 8. susaṁyuktāḥ

«gut verbunden» d. i. «in richtigem Zahlenverhältnisse zu einander

stehend» R. 2, 70, 22. saṁyukta = saṁbandhin «verwandt» PĀR. GṚHY.

3, 10. KAUŚ. 92. «Etwas mit Etwas» (instr.) «verbinden»; pass. «sich

verbinden mit»: nānyo’nyena madhyamāḥ sparśāḥ saṁyujyante na

lakāreṇa rephaḥ ṚV. PRĀT. 12, 2. yādṛgguṇena bhartrā strī saṁyujyeta

yathāvidhi «sich ehelich verbinden» M. 9, 22. pass. «zusammenkommen

mit —, zusammentreffen mit»: raghunātho ‘pyagastyena — saṁyuyuje

śaratkāla ivendunā RAGH. 15, 54. act. «Jmd mit Etwas versehen,

ausrüsten mit, theilhaftig werden lassen»; pass. «theilhaftig werden»: sa

no buddhyā śubhayā saṁyunaktu ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 3, 4 = 4, 1. yauvarājyena

saṁyoktum R. 1, 1, 21 (24 GORR.). samayujyata tīvreṇa klamena MBH.

1, 6289. dehasya kālaparyāyadharmaṇā 3, 15974. jīvena R. 7, 76, 15.

saṁyokṣyase svena vapurmahimnā RAGH. 5, 55. bhṛtyavicārajño bhṛtyaiḥ

saṁyujyate nṛpaḥ Spr. 1976, v. l. saṁyukta «verbunden —, versehen —,

ausgestattet mit» (instr. oder im comp. vorangehend): akṣamālā

vasiṣṭhena saṁyuktā «ehelich verbunden mit» M. 9, 23. dadhnā tu madhu

saṁyuktam H. 833. vadhūnāṭakasaṁghaiśca saṁyuktāṁ sarvataḥ purīm

«angefüllt mit» R. 1, 5, 18. BHAṬṬ. 8, 30. andho ‘ndhai ‘ndhairiva

saṁyuktaḥ R. 4, 17, 7. ācāreṇa M. 1, 109. MBH. 3, 16868.

dharmādharmeṇa HARIV. 2507. lāghavena susaṁyuktaḥ R. 6, 18, 47.

snehasaṁyuktaṁ bhakṣyam M. 5, 24. ratho mātalisaṁyuktaḥ MBH. 3,

1715. sarvābharaṇa- 1, 5975. R. 2, 52, 5. 80, 19. SUŚR. 1, 120, 7.

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 21, 31. 56, 30. KATHĀS. 4, 47. 13, 142. 21, 39. BHĀG. P.

9, 1, 33. 18, 6. LA. (III) 38, 7. 54, 2. H. 832. phala- KĀTY. ŚR. 1, 5, 16.

brahmasteya- M. 2, 116. upapātaka- 11, 108. 257. prīti- 9, 168. 12, 27.

29. śārīraṁ dhanasaṁyuktaṁ daṇḍam 9, 236. gītaiśca stutisaṁyuktaiḥ

MBH. 1, 7718. dharma- 3,16762. 13,335. R.1,4,5.5,4.2,36,15. 56,13,e.

91,3.3,62,15. 24.4,17,50. Spr. 5380. H. 433. PAÑCAT. 185,11. «verbunden

mit» so v. a. «in Verbindung —, in Beziehung stehend zu, betreffend»:

ahoma- KĀTY. ŚR. 1, 3, 36. (nāmadheyam) vaiśyasya dhanasaṁyuktam

M. 2, 31. fg. tadātvāyati- (saṁdhi) 7, 163. stutayaścendrasaṁyuktāḥ

MBH. 3, 12000. 5, 7508. surāsura- (yuddha) so v. a. «der Kampf der

Götter mit den» Asura HARIV. 2507. SĀH. D. 11, 2. — 2) «sich

verbünden»: ahaṁ ca tvaṁ ca vṛtrahansaṁ yujyāva sanibhya ā ṚV. 8, 51,

11. — 3) «stecken —, versetzen in» (loc.): yatra yatraiva saṁyukto dhātrā

garbhe punaḥ punaḥ MBH. 12, 8198. «richten auf»: cittamekatra

saṁyuñjyādaṅge bhagavato muniḥ BHĀG. P. 3, 28, 20. — Vgl. saṁyukta

u.s.w. triṣaṁyukta. — caus. 1) «schirren, bespannen, anspannen»: ratham

R. 3, 39, 5. gandharvaiḥ MBH. 3, 11762. syandanān BHĀG. P. 11, 6, 39.

aśvān KATHĀS. 56, 372. balīvardayugmam 20, 27. — 2) «ausrüsten»:

senām MBH. 4, 1008. — 3) «befestigen an» (loc.): jyāmimāṁ cāpi gāṇḍīve

samayojayat MBH. 3, 12067. yathā meḍhīstambha ākramaṇapaśavaḥ

saṁyojitāḥ BHĀG. P. 5, 23, 2. «hinzufügen zu» (loc.) SŪRYAS. 2, 33.

«heften —, richten auf» (loc.): saṁyojya tasmindṛṣṭim MBH. 15, 700.

saṁyojyātmānamātmani BHĀG. P. 4, 23, 13. 1, 13, 52.

indriyāṇyasaṁyojya «die Sinne nicht richtend» (auf die Aussenwelt)

MAITRJUP. 6, 21. v. l. indriyāṇi saṁyojya «die Sinne bändigend.» astram

«ein Geschoss auflegen, abschiessen» MBH. 3, 816. saṁyojita = upāhita

AK. 3, 2, 41. H. 1485. — 4) «Jmd anstellen» (an ein Amt) MBH. 4, 31. — 5)

«verbinden, zusammenfügen, zusammenbringen, zusammenführen»:

saṁyojitakarayugala PAÑCAT. 230, 19. bhinnaṁ saṁyojayāmāsa BHĀG.

P. 3, 6, 3. daṁpatī ad MEGH. 113. BHĀG. P. 10, 82, 43. «verbinden,

zusammenbringen mit» (instr.) MBH. 13, 2302. saṁyojayāśu tvaṁ

bhāryayā hi dvijottamam MĀRK. P. 69, 65. KATHĀS. 73, 332. «versehen

—, beschenken mit, theilhaftig machen, ausstatten»: dhanurādāya śareṇa

samayojayat HARIV. 12257. lājānviṣeṇa KĀM. NĪTIS. 7, 52. VARĀH. BṚH.

S. 81, 36. yajamānaṁ phalena YĀJÑ. 3, 121. fg. MBH. 1, 4951. 6474. 3,

8434 (med.). RAGH. 16, 86. ŚAṁK. zu BṚH. ĀR. UP. S. 84. KATHĀS. 51,

18. RĀJA-TAR. 4, 46. BHĀG. P. 4, 27, 8. PAÑCAT. 30, 12. 244, 5. SĀY. zu

ṚV. 1, 100, 6. — 6) «Etwas» (acc.) «Jmd» (gen.) «übergeben,

einhändigen» R. 2, 115, 18. PAÑCAT. ed. orn. 26, 20 (besser wäre

nijāṅgābharaṇairvastraiśca). — 7) «veranstalten»: sa vipro vaiṣṇavaṁ

sattraṁ putrārthaṁ samayojayat HARIV. 15393. vṛṣāṇāṁ jātadarpāṇāṁ

yuddhāni samayojayat 4079. «thun, vollbringen» BHĀG. P. 3, 21, 23. — 8)

med. «sich vertiefen» MBH. 5, 7260.

yuj (= 1. yuj) P. 3, 2, 59. 61. Decl. 7, 1, 71. VOP. 3, 133. fg. 1) adj. subst.

«verbunden, zusammengespannt, das an demselben Wagen mitziehende

Thier; Genosse, Verbündeter» ṚV. 1, 7, 5. indra stomamimaṁ mama

kṛṣvā yujaścidantaram 10, 9. yujaṁ vajraṁ vṛṣabhaścakra indraḥ 33, 10.

vayaṁ jayema tvayā yujā vṛtam 102, 4. 129, 4. yujeva vājinā du. 2, 24,

12. yaṁ yaṁ yujaṁ kṛṇute brahmaṇaspatiḥ 25, 1. 4, 28, 1. 2. 32, 6. rāyā

yujā sadhamādaḥ 7, 43, 5 (vgl. 5, 20, 1). 95, 4. brahmāṇastvā vayaṁ yujā

havāmahe 8, 17, 3. 51, 6. te naḥ santu yujaḥ sadā varuṇo mitro aryamā

72, 2. 9, 7, 3. 10, 33, 9. 89, 8. AV. 4, 23, 5. 6, 54, 1. 2. TS. 7, 5, 19, 1. VS.

23, 27. manaśca ha vai vākca yujau devebhyo yajñaṁ vahataḥ ŚAT. BR.

1, 4, 4, 1. 8, 3, 27. ṢAḌV. BR. 3, 7. Nasalirte Formen (nach den

Grammatikern sollen alle starken Casus des nicht componirten yuj

nasalirt sein): imaṁ taṁ paśya vṛṣabhasya yuñjam ṚV. 10, 102, 9. harī te

yuñjā pṛṣatī abhūtām 1, 162, 21. — avidyayā yuk «versehen —, behaftet

mit» BHĀG. P. 11, 11, 7. yuṅmiyaḥ «Furcht erregend» BHAṬṬ. 6, 118.

Häufig am Ende eines comp. «bespannt mit»: hariyujaṁ ratham MBH. 3,

12023. HARIV. 8879. haryaśva- MBH. 3, 16510. harisahasra- RAGH. 12,

103. hayottama- MBH. 5, 3341. divyāśva- 7130. 14, 2612. śveta- 8, 1751.

«verbunden —, versehen mit»: prīti- HARIV. 14410. ŚATR. 1, 298. puṇyāḥ

kāmayujo («Wünsche gewährend») ‘drayaḥ HARIV. 11449

(sarvakāmayutādrayaḥ die neuere Ausg.). agni- 15502. vrīḍā- R. 4, 10,

31. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 51, 34. 76, 7. yoga- BHĀG. P. 3, 33, 13.

janmarkṣaśroṇayoga- 7, 14, 23. śuddhi-, mati- PAÑCAR. 3, 2, 7.

triguṇatantu- 7, 6. 15, 12. kriyā- H. 565. vṛṣṭi- 1107. samakālayujaḥ = ye

samakālameva yujyante BHĀG. P. 5, 23, 1. ugra- 3, 21, 45 nach dem

Comm. = ugrā yuk yogo yasya, es könnte aber ugra auch als nom. abstr.

gefasst werden. — 2) adj. «paarig, geradzahlig» (a- «nicht paarig») LĀṬY.

6, 5, 16. 27. ṚV. PRĀT. 13, 16. M. 3, 277. MBH. 3, 1358. Ind. St. 8, 307.

309. 312. 337. 339. VARĀH. BṚH. 1, 7. MĀRK. P. 30, 14. — 3) «Paar,

Zweizahl» ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. taruṇīkuca- PAÑCAR. 3, 12, 14. 2, 18. «die

Zwillinge im Thierkreise» Ind. St. 2, 259. yujau «die beiden» Aśvin TRIK.

1, 1, 65. — Vgl. a-, aruṇa-, arśo-, aśva-, ṛta-, caturyuj (auch MBH. 1,

7343, wo mit der ed. Bomb. -ryujāṁ st. -ryugāṁ zu lesen ist, duryuj,

dharma-, nitya-, puṁ-, prātaryuj (hier auch mit act. Bed.), brahma-, bha-,

mano-, mitra-, yuvā-, rakṣo-, ratha-, vaco-, sa-, su-, sva-.

yuj 1 (pra) yuñjīyāt R. ed. Bomb. 1, 4, 3. — 5) Sp. 152, Z. 32. fg. vgl.

evaṁyukta «so beschaffen» PAT. a. a. O.5,57,b.

abhi 8) -yukta so v. a. «bloss berührt» Spr. (II) 2846.

ā, partic. āyukta = yukta «behaftet mit»: śramāyukta «ermüdet» R.

GORR. 2, 11, 11.

vyā vgl. vyāyoga.

paryupa «verbrauchen»: tatra cāsyāgamakālenaivāyuḥ kṛtsnaṁ

paryupayuktaṁ syāt PAT. a. a. O.1,11,a.

saṁni, partic. -yukta «verbunden mit»: pratyaya- ebend. 4,77,a.

pra desid. «anwenden —, gebrauchen wollen» so v. a. «nöthig haben»:

śabdānprayuyukṣamāṇaḥ ebend. 1,14,a.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

yuj 1. yuj (akin to 1. yu), ii. 7, yunaj, yuñj, Par. Ātm. i. 1, Par.

1. To join, Chr. 290, 7 = Rigv. i. 64, 7 (ved. ayugdhvam, ii. 2); MBh. 3,

2489.

2. To connect, Draup. 4, 24.

3. To endow, Rām. 1, 9, 68.

4. To put to, Chr. 291, 4 = Rigv. i. 85, 4; MBh. 1, 192.

5. To direct, to throw, Chr. 41, 2 (anomal. ayuñjam).

6. To fix one’s mind in order to obtain union with the universal spirit,

Rhāṣāp. 64.

7. To meditate, Bhāg. 6, 12.

8. To appoint, MBh. 2, 1290.

9. To employ, Man. 6, 12. Ptcple. of the pres. Ātm. yuñjāna, Suitable,

MBh. 3, 15633. m.

1. One who endeavours to obtain union with the universal soul, or one

who is engaged in the religious exercise called yoga, Bhāṣāp. 64.

2. A charioteer. Pass., and i. 4, Ātm. (in epic poetry also with the

terminations of the Par.).

1. To be fit, becoming, Hit. iv. d. 11; Pañc. 61, 4; i. d. 283 (Par.).

2. To be placed, Hit. iv. d. 76 (cf. Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 3265).

3. To attach one’s self to, Hit. iv. d. 65.

4. To make one’s self ready, Bhag. 2, 38.

5. To unite one’s self with, to attain, Man. 2, 78.

6. To be obliged, Man. 7, 144.

7. To meditate, Bhag. 2, 50. Ptcple. of the pf. pass. yukta.

1. Joined.

2. Fit, Pañc. 69, 10.

3. Proved.

4. Endowed with, Hit. iv. d. 33 (kālena na, Not endowed with, not

seizing the right time; cf. Hit. iv. d. 47: a-lāla-sainya-yukta, Not

possessed of an army at the right time).

5. Employed.

6. Occupied, Man. 3, 75.

7. Intent on, 8, 142.

8. Occupied in the performance of the Yoga.

9. A student, Man. 2, 223.

10. °tam, adv. Well, Vikr. 12, 6.

11. Comparat. yuktatara, One who is to the utmost on his guard, Man.

7, 186. m. The sage who has acquired union with the universal soul,

Bhāṣāp. 64. f. tā, A plant, commonly Eláni. n. A measure of four cubits.

Comp. a-, adj. 1. regligent, Rām. 3, 37, 7. 2. not used to, ib. 3, 37, 23. 3.

unsuitable, Pañc. 170, 8. kṣema-yukta + m, adv. in a prosperous way,

Rām. 1, 13, 10. tapas-, adj. devout, Chr. 9, 41. vidhāna-, adj. conformable

to the sacred precepts, Chr. 51, 19. Ptcple. of the fut. pass. yogya.

1. Fit, Hit. ii. d. 73.

2. Suitable, Hit. i. d. 62, M.M.

3. Able, Rājat. 5, 249.

4. Clever. See s. v. Comp. artha-, adj. profitable, Daśak. in Chr. 181, 6.

Caus., and i. 10, Par.

1. To join, Hit. i. d. 53, M.M.; Rājat. 5, 104; to fix (a snare), Hit. 46, 9,

M.M.

2. To achieve, Rājat. 5, 403.

3. To treat, Pañc. iv. d. 74.

4. To bring on, to instigate, Pañc. iv. d. 18.

5. To entangle, Pañc. ii. d. 125 (Ātm.).

6. To mix, Man. 7, 218.

7. To oblige, Chr. 18, 34.

8. To put to, Rām. 2, 82, 31.

9. To place, Hit. iii. d. 80.

10. To appoint, Rājat. 5, 129.

11. To throw, Chr. 33, 2.

12. To endow, Man. 1, 26; Vikr. d. 60.

13. To present with, to give, MBh. 1, 6477.

14. To return, Daśak. 185, 12.

15. Pass. To belong, MBh. 3, 12313. i. 10, Ātm. † To despise.

— With the prep. śranu anu, ii. 7, Ātm.

1. To examine, Man. 8, 31.

2. To order, MBh. 4, 105.

3. To choose a husband, MBh. 3, 15633.

— With abhi abhi, Ātm.

1. To prepare for, Daśak. in Chr. 190, 2.

2. To draw near, to attack, 200, 23. Pass.

1. To be accused, Man. 8, 183; to be asked (in lawsuit), Vikr. d. 96.

2. To be rebuked, Man. 8, 50. abhiyukta,

1. Diligent, Vedāntas. in Chr. 217, 4; ever striving, Utt. Rāmac. 73, 8.

2. Absorbed in meditation, Pañc. i. d. 345.

3. Attacked, assailed, Hit. iv. d. 24.

4. Hurt, Rām. 2, 10, 27.

5. Accused, prosecuted. Caus. To appoint, Pañc. 163. 15.

— With ā ā, Ātm. To put, MBh. 1, 7948. āyukta, m. Commissioned, an

agent, a deputy, Bhaṭṭ. 8, 115.

— With samupā sam-upa-ā, samupāyukta, Surrounded, MBh. 3, 10099.

— With samā sam-ā, samāyukta,

1. Connected, Man. 12, 28; united, Nal. 25, 8.

2. Surrounded, MBh. 3, 3017.

3. Gifted, endowed, Pañc. iii. d. 117; Hit. i. d. 174, M.M. Caus. To join,

MBh. 1, 7200 (to string).

— With ud ud, udyukta,

1. Excited, Rām. 1, 1, 45.

2. Zealously active, Hit. iii. d. 112; Rājat. 5, 331.

3. Extended, Lass. 67, 1. Caus. To excite, to make ready, MBh. 5, 70.

— With samud sam-ud, Caus. To order to act, Mālav. 9, 16.

— With upa upa, Ātm.

1. To meddle, MBh. 5, 992.

2. To employ for one’s self, Man. 8, 40.

3. To enjoy, Megh. 13.

2. To consume, MBh. 3, 57.

4. To attach one’s self to, MBh. 3. 15633. Pass.

1. To be suitable, Pañc. 155, 8; to be of use, Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 1915; to

be necessary, Pañc. i. d. 372; an-upayujyamāna, Unable to be employed,

quite weak, Utt. Rāmac. 95, 1.

2. To employ for one’s self, MBh. 3, 12739.

3. To be worth being regarded, Pañc. i. d. 37. upayukta,

1. Suitable, Hit. 98, 14 (kim upayukto ‘yam etad vartanaṁ gṛhṇāty

athānupayukto vā, Whether he deserves so large a pay or not; literally,

whether he receives so large a pay as a suitable person, or as an

unsuitable).

2. Touched by.

3. Taken.

4. Eaten. Comp. au-, adj. unworthy, Śāk. 97, 3.

— With samupa sam-upa, To consume, MBh. 3, 1538.

— With ni ni, Ātm.

1. To place; to put to (as horses), Vikr. d. 155; to place at the head,

Hit. iii. d. 128; to engage, Johns. Sel. 37, 19; to appoint, Man. 1, 28;

Pañc. i. d. 82.

2. To constrain, Chr. 10, 3; to cocrce, Rām. 1, 1, 92; to harass, Man.

8, 186.

3. To order, Rām. 1. 54, 16.

4. To commit, Man. 9, 64. niyukta,

1. Connected, Hit. i. d. 158, M.M.

2. fastened, Rām. 1, 13, 31.

3. Placed, Hit. 81, 13.

4. Ascertained.

5. Engaged in.

6. Commanded, Rām. 1, 14, 34.

7. Appointed, Hit. 58, 17.

8. Authorised, Man. 9, 58.

9. Offered, Man. 5, 16. m. A functionary, Hit. ii. d. 105. Ptcple. of the

fut. pass. niyojya.

1. To be placed, Pañc. i. d. 82.

2. To be ordered, MBh. 12, 12358. m. A servant, Śāk. d. 163. Comp.

a-niyogya, and a-niyojya, adj. not suitable to be commanded, Rām. 2, 66,

7; MBh. 1, 3267. Caus.

1. To order to be put. Hit. 46, 13.

2. To fasten, Pañc. 135, 4; to bring (saṁdehe, in danger), Pañc. 8, 21;

to accustom, 21, 6.

3. To endow, Pañc. 4, 25.

4. To employ, Man. 9, 324; Pañc. i. d. 413; pass. To employ one’s self,

Pañc. v. d. 68.

5. To appoint, to charge, Rām. 1, 38, 10.

6. To direct, Man. 9, 68; to order, to refer (to an ordeal), Pañc. 97, 1.

7. To coerce, Bhag. 3, 36.

8. To offer Pañc. 70, 3.

9. To present with, Pañc. 4, 25.

10. To perform, Man. 3, 204; to make, Pañc. 24, 5.

— With vini vi-ni,

1. To appoint, to charge, MBh. 1, 4152.

2. To use, Utt. Rāmac. 148, 10; Lass. 95, 9. viniyukta,

1. Separated, detached, loosed, Johns. Sel. 31, 46.

2. Parted with.

3. Appointed.

4. Applied to. Caus.

1. To appoint, Hit. iii. d. 54.

2. To intrust, Man. 7, 226.

— With saṁni sam-ni, To appoint, MBh. 1, 2500. saṁniyukta,

1. Appointed.

2. Attached to. Caus.

1. To appoint, MBh. 1, 6912.

2. To allot, Pañc. ii. d. 78.

— With vinis vi-n s, To throw, Rām. 2, 23, 37.

— With pra pra,

1. To put to, Chr. 291, 5 = Rigv. i. 85, 5.

2. To put at the head, Bhaṭṭ. 3, 51.

3. To join, Rām. 1, 17, 11.

4. To employ, Man. 2, 159; Pañc. i. d. 39.

5. To direct, Chr. 287, 4 = Rigv. i. 48, 4.

6. To conduct, Mālav. 45, 9.

7. To throw, Chr. 31, 11.

8. To give, Rām. 1, 13, 38.

9. To lend, Man. 8, 146.

10. To perform, Man. 2, 248.

11. To represent, Mālav. 3, 10.

12. To behove, to be convenient (i. 4, Ātm., or Pass.), Pañc. 224, 24.

prayukta,

1. Connected with, Rām. 1, 17, 14.

2. Closely united.

3. Suitable, MBh. 1, 6845.

4. Endowed with.

5. Resulting from, Hit. ii. d. 59.

6. Appointed, Rām. 3, 51, 27.

7. Governed, Lass. 53, 10.

8. Lent, Man. 8, 49.

9. Done, Śāk. 95, 13.

10. Lost in meditation. n. Cause. Comp. su-, 1. closely connected. 2.

well managed. Caus.

1. To throw, Chr. 31, 7.

2. To cause to be exhibited, Utt. Rāmac. 111, 7.

3. To show, Map. 3, 112.

4. To receive, Man. 10, 117. Ptcple. of the fut. pass, prayojya.

1. To be set to work.

2. To be used. m. A servant n. Capital, principal.

— With vipra vi-pra,

1. To separate, Rām. 2, 53, 20.

2. To deprive, MBh. 1, 6735.

— With saṁpra sam-pra, To connect, MBh. 1, 4475. saṁprayukta,

1. Joined.

2. Connected with, holding any intercourse with, Man. 11, 179.

3. Overtaken, reached. Caus. To connect, MBh. 3, 1153.

— With vi vi, Ātm.

1. To separate, MBh. 3, 10924.

2. To abandon, Chr. 47, 35 (Par., perhaps it is to be changed to

mokshyasi). Pass. To be deprived, Pañc. i. d. 340; to lose, Man. 7, 46; to

violate, 5, 91. a-viyukta, adj. Not separated, Vikr. 78, 20. a-viyojya, Not to

be deprived, Daśak. in Chr. 196, 12. Caus. To cause to leave, to break off

from, Pañc. 31, 6.

2. To deprive, Pañc. 30, 10; MBh. 3, 2851; to rob, 1, 6225.

— With sam sam,

1. To unite, Man. 9, 22.

2. To endow, MBh. 1, 6289; to endow with, Rām. 1, 1, 21. saṁyukta,

1. Connected, Chr. 59, 22.

2. Attached.

3. Accompanied.

4. Mixed.

5. Endowed with, Man. 1, 109. Caus.

1. To join, MBh. 3, 11762.

2. To endow with, MBh. 1, 6474; Pañc. 244, 5; to present with, Pañc.

30, 12.

3. To employ, MBh. 3, 816.

4. Ātm. To meditate, Chr. 38, 13.

— With visam vi-sam, visaṁyukta, Separated from, neglecting, Man. 2,

80.

— Cf. Lat. jungere; [greek] A.S. geocan, geóce, help.

— Cf. yuga.

yuj 2. yuj,

I. adj. Even, Man. 3, 277.

II. m.

1. A joiner.

2. One who devotes his time to abstract speculation.

III. (n.), A pair.

IV. Latter part of comp. adj. Joined, which are (horses) put to, drawn by,

Chr. 27, 7. catur-, adj. Drawn by four horses, MBh. 1, 8005. hari-, adj.

Drawn by (Indra’s) horses, Arj. 4, 32.

— Cf. Lat. -jux in conjux.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

yuj yunakti yuṅkta yujate1 v & yuñjati yuñjate pp. yukta (q.v.) yoke,

harness (of waggon and steed); make ready, fit out, prepare, arrange,

set to work (P. refl.); apply, use, fasten or fix on put or place (dhuri at

the head lit. at the thill), turn or direct (esp. the mind) upon (loc.);

(yogam) be intent on, meditate (also M.); appoint, institute; bid, order,

enjoin; unite, connect, join with (instr.); P. M. cling to, adhere, marry; A.

present or furnish with (acc. of pers. & instr. of th., or loc. gen. of pers. &

acc. of th.); M. become possessed of (acc.); P. the same (instr. ±saha)

or fall to one’s (gen.) share or lot, be fit or suitable for (loc., gen. or

instr.), be proper or right. C. yojayati te yoke, harness, fit out, array; use,

employ, undertake, begin; appoint to or charge with (loc.), fasten, fix

(esp. the mind) or place on (loc.); unite, connect, furnish, endow with

(instr.). D. yuyukṣati wish to lay on or to appoint. —

anu strive to overtake, pursue; ask, question (acc. of pers. or & th.).

abhi A. appoint to, charge with (loc.); A. (M.) prepare or get ready for

(acc. or infin.); M. (A.) yoke, harness, put to; attack, march against; P.

be sued for or be accused of (acc.). C. furnish with, make a pers. (acc.)

share in (instr.).

pratyabhi attack or accuse in return.

ā harness, put to (loc.); M. fasten, put on, place in (loc.). C. fix upon

(loc.), put together.

samā arrange, prepare; join, bring together with (instr.).

ud make one’s self ready, set to work; set off, be gone. C. urge on,

impel, also =

samud C. incite or animate to (dat.).

upa M. (A.) yoke, harness, put to (loc.); use, employ, appropriate,

enjoy; consume, eat. P. be applied, be useful, necessary, requisite, or

qualified for (loc., dat. of th., gen. of pers.).

ni M. (A.) fasten or put to (loc., dhuri = S.); join, put together; bind or

attach to, fix or turn upon (loc. or dat.); put (a task) upon, commission,

elect (2 acc.), appoint to, charge with (acc. of pers. & loc. or dat. of th.;

or loc. of pers. & acc. of th.); use, employ. C. harness, put to (loc.); tie

on, fasten, set (jewels); direct, impel, exhort or constrain to (dat., acc.

w.

prati, loc., or artham), appoint to (loc.), choose for, elect (2 acc.);

commit or entrust to (loc.); set, lay, fix; place in or upon, take into or to

(loc.); employ, set to work; furnish with, cause to partake of (instr.).

vini M. (A.) loosen, untie, unharness, shoot of—at (loc.), appoint to,

destine for (loc., dat. or artham); place, fix (the mind) upon; use,

employ; eat, consume. C. appoint to, charge with (loc., arthāya or

artham); commit to (loc.), present, offer to (dat.), use, employ.

saṁni place in or on (loc.); commission, appoint, employ. C. the

same, charge with ( =

vini C.); urge on, impel; destine, assign.

pra M. (A.) harness, put to (loc.), prepare (instr.) for (dat.), join with

(instr.), set in motion, hurl, cast shut off-at (loc. or dat.), turn or fix upon

(loc.), utter, pronounce, show, manifest; animate, impel, bid, direct to

(dat. or loc.), elect, choose for (2 acc.), bring to or into (acc.), place at or

upon (loc.), add; use, employ; effect, produce; arrange, execute, perform

(d.). P. be fit or suitable. c. hurl, cast; bring forth, utter, show, betray; fix,

concentrate (the mind); direct, instruct, appoint to (loc.), commit to

(dat.), begin, undertake; represent, perform; use, employ; exact

(interest).

anupra M. add after (abl.); pursue, overtake; follow.

vipra sever from (instr.); C. deprive or rid of (instr.).

saṁpra yoke, harness, set in motion, let loose; execute. perform

(music). P. be joined or added; partake or be guilty of (instr.). C. fit out

make ready; join or connect with (instr.); bring forth, use, employ.

vi detach or sever from (instr.); A.M. liberate from or deprive of

(instr., r. abl.); M.P. relax, yield, give way. C. separate, rid or deprive of

(abl. or instr.).

sam A. put together, join, unite, bind, fetter; endow or furnish with

(instr.), fix (the mind) upon (loc.). C. yoke, harness; fit out. equip (an

army), lay on, shoot off (an arrow), turn or fix (the mind) on (loc.)

appoint (to a commission), intrust or commit to (gen.); perform,

accomplish; add to (loc.), put together, join, etc. = S. — Cf. abhiyukta

āyukta udyukta upayukta niyukta niryukta (add.), prayukta viprayukta

viyukta visaṁyukta saṁyukta saṁprayukta samāyukta.

yuj [2] a. yoked together, harnessed with, drawn by (—°), endowed or

furnished with (instr. or —°); pair, even. m. comrade, companion.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

yuj YUJ, VIII. (V., C.) yunakti, yuṅkte, VI. yuñja (E., rare), II. yuj (almost

invariably Ā.; RV., common), VI.Ā. yuja (RV.1), I. yoja (RV., rare),

harness, yoke (horses) to (in., lc.), (car) with (in.); fig. = prepare, equip

(an army), perform (sacrifice), offer (prayer), employ, use, apply; fix

(arrows) on the bowstring, against (lc.); fasten, put on (ornaments);

place or put on or in (lc.); appoint to, entrust with (d., lc.); fix

(affections) on any one (lc.); concentrate (the mind or thoughts) on (lc.);

P. Ā. concentrate oneself, meditate deeply (± yogam); recollect, recall

(anything; E.); join, unite, connect, with (in.); Ā. unite oneself with (in.)

in marriage; associate oneself with (in.); connect any one with anything

= associate, furnish, endow with (in.); bestow anything (ac.) on any one

(g., lc.), on oneself (ātmani) = use for oneself (Ā.); ps. yujyate, prepare

oneself for (d.); attach oneself (also fig.) to (lc.); be joined or united

(also in marriage); be bound by (duty: in.); be joined with = become

possessed of, gain, receive, attain anything (in. ± saha); accrue to any

one (g.); be adapted to, fit anything (in.), be fitted for (lc.); be applicable

to or suitable for any one (lc.); be right; be appropriate or becoming; be

fit or deserve to be (nm.); properly belong to or suit any one (g., lc.); be

logically correct: w. na, not be suitable, proper, becoming, appropriate, or

advisable for (in., g.) to (ing.); ought not to be (inf. w. ps. mg.); cs.

yojaya, P. (Ā. metr.) yoke, to (lc.), with (in.); equip (an army), draw up

(troops); employ, use; carry on (conversation); undertake, begin; appoint

to, entrust with (lc.); urge, instigate to (d.); assist any one to (lc.); set

(snares, nets); fix (esp. arrows), on (lc.), aim (arrows) at (lc.); attach,

adjust (lute-strings, etc.), to (lc.); place in, put into (lc.); concentrate

(the mind) on (lc.); join, unite, bring together, with (in.); put together,

compose; arrange; embrace with (in.); finish; provide, furnish, endow,

with (in.); mix (food) with (in.); bestow anything (ac.) on (lc.): pp.

yojita, provided with (in. or -°); des. yuyukṣa, P. wish to appoint; wish to

aim (arrows) at (d.).

anu, seek to come up with, pursue (Br.); ask or question (ac.), about

(ac.); examine (a witness); instruct; attach oneself to, take service with

(ac.): pp. instructed; accompanied by (-°); devoted to, intent on (ac.).

pari+a-nu, ply with questions (only gd. & pp.).

abhi, Ā. march against, attack (ac.); operate; set about anything

(ac.); prepare to (inf.); treat (medically) with (in.); P. charge or entrust

any one (ac.) with (lc.); ps. be accused of or charged with (an offence:

ac.): pp.

abhi-yukta, attacked; accused, prosecuted; concentrated; careful of,

devoted to, intent on (lc. or -°); well-versed or proficient in (lc. or -°);

claimed, demanded; cs. provide (ac.) with anything (in.).

prati+abhi, Ā. make a counter attack on (ac.): pp. attacked by (in.);

cs. bring a counter charge against (ac.). ā, yoke, to (lc.); Ā. put on,

adjust (an ornament); bestow anything (ac.) on (lc.): pp. yoked to (lc.);

concentrated, intent; *appointed to, commissioned with (g., lc.);

possessed of (-°); cs. pp. placed upon, attached to (lc.); composed or

fashioned of (-°).

upa+ā, P. yoke (RV.).

sam-upa+ā, pp. filled with (in.).

sam-ā, prepare, equip; entrust anything (ac.) to (lc.); come into

conflict with (in.): pp.

sam-ā-yukta, come into contact with (in.); connected, united,

furnished, or endowed with (in., -°); cs. provide with (in.).

ud, get ready or prepare, set to work, to (inf.); depart (Br.): pp.

prepared, ready, zealous, assiduous, strenuous (w. d., lc., prati + ac., —

°); cs. excite, instigate, to (d.).

sam-ud, cs. urge, instigate to (d.).

upa, Ā. (P.) yoke (V.); associate oneself with (ac.; RV.); attach

oneself to, enter the service of (ac.); appropriate; trouble oneself about

(lc.); use, employ; enjoy; eat, consume; ps. be employed, be applicable,

suitable, useful, requisite (w. g. of prs., d. of object, lc. of sphere): pp.

upayukta, eaten up, consumed; applicable to, suitable, necessary, or

requisite, for any one (g.), appropriate, for (lc. or -°); worthy, deserving

(person); cs. come into contact with (ac.); employ; cause to be

consumed by sthg. (2 ac.).

pari+upa, pp. consumed.

vi+upa, trouble about (lc.).

sam-upa, consume; cs. id.

ni, gnly. Ā. tie up, bind, to (lc.): sp. of the sacrificial animal to the

post; yoke to the pole (dhuri), also = place at the head, impose the

heaviest burden on; join (the hands); attach to or make dependent on

any one (d., lc.); constrain, urge to (lc.); appoint to, entrust with, order

or commission to (d., lc., inf., or -artham; ord. mg.); appoint any one as

(2 ac.); enjoin (ac.) on (lc.); call to account (only fp.); place in (lc.), lead

into (a path: lc.); direct (the mind or gaze) to (d., lc.); apply: pp.

niyuk-ta, bound; ordered, directed, authorized, commissioned,

appointed (ord. mg.), to (d., lc., inf., -°, -artham); directed towards (lc.);

placed; prescribed: -m, ad. necessarily; cs. yoke, to (lc.); attach or fasten

to (lc.); direct, urge, call upon to (d., prati + ac., or -artham); coerce,

constrain, or force to (lc. or -artham); appoint to (an office), employ in

(an occupation: lc.); appoint as, make (2 ac., in order to, inf.); confer (an

office) on (lc.); set, lay (snares), place upon, bring to (lc.); fix (the mind)

on; reduce to (servitude), bring to or into (sorrow, danger: lc.); bestow

(ac.) on (lc.), devote (oneself) to (d.); set about, perform (a rite); apply

(intellect); endow or provide (ac.) with (in.). punish with (in.).

anu-ni, attach to, make dependent on (lc.).

vi-ni, Ā. (P.) loose, detach; discharge (arrows), at (lc.); appoint to,

entrust with, destine for (d., lc., -artham); direct (the mind) to; use,

employ, apply; eat; ps. fall to pieces, decay (house, body); cs. appoint or

direct to, entrust with (lc., -artham, -arthāya); entrust (ac.) to (lc.);

present or offer (ac.) to (d.); use, employ; perform. saṁ-ni, bring into

(distress, lc.); order, direct any one (ac.): pp. ordered; joined with (-°);

cs. bring into (lc.); appoint to, entrust with (lc., -artham, -arthāya); allot:

pp. directed, urged; allotted.

nis, pp.

niryukta, erected, built.

pra, Ā. yoke, to (lc.); set in motion, throw, level, discharge (missiles),

at (d., lc.); utter or address (words, etc.) pronounce (a blessing), recite

(a verse); display, exhibit (anger, contempt), towards (lc.); fix (the mind,

thoughts) on (lc.); direct, order, urge (to, d., lc.); choose as (2 ac.); lead

or bring to or into (ac.); place upon (lc.); use, employ (ord. mg.);

perform, do, accomplish, contrive, execute; represent on the stage, act;

undertake; cause, produce; lend (for use or interest); ps. be in use; be

suitable or appropriate, conduce to (d.): pp. -prayukta, yoked; stirred (by

the wind); employed, used; done; lent; suitable, appropriate; resulting

from; n. imps. behaved or acted towards (lc. or prati + ac.); cs. throw,

discharge (missiles), at (lc.); pronounce (blessings); concentrate (the

mind); show, exhibit (a feeling),, towards (d., lc.); urge, send away, to

(lc.); appoint to (lc.); entrust (ac.) to (d.); undertake; represent on the

stage; cause to be represented or exhibited by (in.); use, employ; take

(interest, vṛddhim); invest (capital, prayogam); be applicable; aim at,

have in view; des. wish to use, require.

anu-pra, Ā. affix, to (ab.); pursue (V.); follow (V.).

prati-pra, P. attach in place of sthg., substitute (Br.); Ā. discharge (a

debt).

vi-pra, separate from, deprive of (in.); ps. be separated from: pp. -vi-

pra-yukta, separated or far from, free from, lacking (in. or -°); cs.

separate from, deprive of (in.); free from (in.). saṁ-pra, ps. be joined,

with (in.); have carnal connexion with (in.); be involved in or guilty of

(in.): pp. joined, united, connected, mingled, or provided with (in., -°);

come into contact with (in.); come to blows (du.); engaged in (-°);

dependent on (lc.); urged; concentrated, intent; cs. make ready; connect,

with (in.); broach (a question); use, employ.

prati, yoke or attach to (ac.; RV.); discharge (a debt); cs. adjust (an

arrow).

vi, P. disconnect, separate; P. Ā. free from, deprive of (in., rarely ab.);

Ā. forsake or leave any one (ac.); abate, leave off; ps. be separated, from

(in.); be freed from or deprived of, lose (in.); break (a vow: in.); relax,

cease, depart: pp.

viyukta, separated; disunited; separated from, free from, destitute of,

lacking (in., -°); cs. separate; free from (ab.); deprive of (in.); take away

(life): pp.

viyogita, separated from (in., -°); deprived of (in., -°).

sam, P. bring together, connect, unite; bind; provide, furnish, endow,

with (in.); league oneself together (du.; RV.); fix (the mind on (lc.); ps.

have carnal (grāmyadharmatayā) connexion; be joined with (in.); be

united with in marriage; meet or fall in with (in.); become possessed of

(in.): pp. saṁyukta, joined, united, combined, all together (pl.); conjunct

(consonants); connected, related; provided, endowed, filled, or

accompanied with, possessed of (in., -°); connected with, relating to (-

°); placed in (lc.); cs. yoke; equip (an army); restrain (the senses);

adjust or discharge (a missile); fix (the mind or gaze) on (lc.); attach to

(lc.); appoint; deliver anything (ac.) to (g.); join, unite, bring together,

with (in.); provide, supply, present, or endow, with (in.); institute,

perform; Ā. concentrate one’s mind.

vi-sam, pp. separated from, destitute of, lacking; keeping away from,

neglecting (in.).

yuj yuj, a. yoked together (V.); yoked with or drawn by (-°); joined,

united, or furnished with, possessed of (-°, sts. in.); granting, bestowing

(-°); even (not odd); m. yoke-fellow, comrade, associate (V.); pair,

couple.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

yuj tri° di° yuja kvip . 1 samādhimati . yuk yujau . ru° yuja kvip . 2

saṁyogavati tri° yuṅ yuñjau yuñjaḥ iti bhedaḥ cu° yuja—ninde bhāve kvip

. 3 nindāyām avya° .

  • Rating:
  • Views:84 views
  • Tags: -
  • Categories: Sanskrit

Comments

Write a comment

*